HomeMy WebLinkAboutA_Project_Specifications_20221005_V1Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 02 4100
Renton Technical College DEMOLITION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 02 4100 - 1
SECTION 02 4100 - DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification
sections, apply to this Section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2019.
1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated as existing, for salvage, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner’s property,
demolished materials shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the
Contractor’s option.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition Plan: Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, and temporary controls.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCOPE
A. Demolish and remove portions of the existing building as indicated in Drawings and as required to perform new work.
3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000.
B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.
3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or
public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.
4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
5. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants.
6. Do not close or obstruct driveways, parking areas, fire lanes, or sidewalks without coordination with Owner.
7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at
any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.
C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring as necessary to prevent damage to elements left in place.
E. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous
materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
F. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.
3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination
prior to starting demolition.
C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 02 4100
Renton Technical College DEMOLITION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 02 4100 - 2
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
D. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Maintain existing active systems (HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications) that are to
remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components.
2. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
3. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
4. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
5. Patch as specified for patching new work.
3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 7419 - Waste Management.
C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 03 3000
Renton Technical College CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 5
September 30, 2022 03 3000 - 1
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Patching of slabs on grade.
B. Concrete reinforcement.
C. Concrete curing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and
isolation joints in slabs.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete 1991
(Reapproved 2009).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete 2016.
C. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction 2015.
D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
E. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting 2010.
F. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting 2016.
G. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete 2016.
H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 2014 (Errata 2017).
I. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
2016.
J. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and
Deformed, for Concrete 2017.
K. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete 2012.
L. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2016, with Editorial Revision (2016).
M. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 2018.
N. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 2018.
O. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or
(50-mm) Cube Specimens) 2020b.
P. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 2015a.
Q. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2018.
R. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
2015.
S. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing
2014.
T. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 2015.
U. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete 2013.
V. ASTM C1116/C1116M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete 2010a (Reapproved 2015).
W. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete 2012.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 03 3000
Renton Technical College CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 5
September 30, 2022 03 3000 - 2
X. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) 2018.
Y. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers 2014.
Z. ASTM E1155M - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers
(Metric) 2014.
AA. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used
in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
BB. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill
under Concrete Slabs 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified
requirements and installation instructions.
1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering
adhesives.
B. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.
1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete Mixtures.
2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with fiber reinforcing manufacturer's written recommendations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi).
1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars unless otherwise noted.
B. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during
concrete placement.
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II - Moderate Portland type.
1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.
1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
D. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120.
E. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.
2.03 ADMIXTURES
A. Admixtures: The use of admixtures shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. When more than one admixture
is used in the mix, furnish satisfactory evidence to the Architect that the admixture to be used are compatible in
combination with the cement and aggregates. Provide only one brand of each type of admixture. Accelerating
admixtures shall not be used unless approved by the Architect.
B. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 03 3000
Renton Technical College CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 5
September 30, 2022 03 3000 - 3
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as
suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is
prohibited.
1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated
boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
3. Manufacturers:
a. ISI Building Products; Viper VaporCheck II 15-mil (Class A): www.isibp.com/#sle.
b. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils: www.stegoindustries.com/#sle.
c. W. R. Meadows, Inc; PERMINATOR Class A - 15 mils (0.38 mm): www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.05 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Epoxy Bonding System:
1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Company; DURALFLEX GEL: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle.
b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste, Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State, Rezi-Weld
1000: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2
inch deep sealant pocket after removal.
1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber.
2. Manufacturers:
a. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Fiber Expansion Joint Filler with Snap-Cap: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C. Slab Contraction Joint Device: Preformed linear strip intended for pressing into wet concrete to provide straight
route for shrinkage cracking.
1. Manufacturers:
a. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Speed-E-Joint: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.06 CURING MATERIALS
A. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound; complying with
ASTM C309.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dayton Superior Corporation; Clear Resin Cure J11W: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle.
b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; 1100-Clear: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag as is
consistent with ACI recommendations.
B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or required by
manufacturer.
C. Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi.
2. Fly Ash and Slag Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 03 3000
Renton Technical College CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 5
September 30, 2022 03 3000 - 4
2.08 MIXING
A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each batch not less than 1-
1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
C. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not add water that exceeds
the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning and
applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.
B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and
pack solid with non-shrink grout.
C. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal
joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's
written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering.
1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor retarder as indicated
on drawings. Do not use sand.
3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position,
support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection.
B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps
with tie wire.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during
concrete placement.
D. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction joints are
necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound
surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting.
E. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
3.05 SLAB JOINTING
A. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
B. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness
of slab, set flush with top of slab.
C. Contraction Joint Devices: Use preformed joint device, with top set flush with top of slab.
D. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable
top section for joint sealant.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin floor coverings
include carpeting and resilient flooring.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 03 3000
Renton Technical College CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 5
September 30, 2022 03 3000 - 5
3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying,
excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of
cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously
moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated
burlap.
2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality
Requirements.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain
test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete placed.
D. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as
concrete it represents.
E. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M.
3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified
requirements.
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall
be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each
individual area.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 06 1000
Renton Technical College ROUGH CARPENTRY
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 06 1000 - 1
SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preservative treated wood materials.
B. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
C. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2016a.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2020.
C. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing 2003
(Reapproved 2017).
D. ASTM D3498 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Wood Structural Panels (Plywood or Oriented
Strand Board) to Wood Based Floor System Framing 2019a.
E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2020.
F. AWC (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings 2015.
G. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood 2018.
H. PS 1 - Structural Plywood 2009.
I. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels 2010.
J. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard 2020.
K. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified
requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to
allow air circulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If no species is specified, provide species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified,
provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified requirements.
3. Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber
Standard Committee at www.alsc.org, and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified;
provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
B. Provide sustainably harvested wood; see Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 06 1000
Renton Technical College ROUGH CARPENTRY
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 06 1000 - 2
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5.
B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch
thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and
preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
B. Construction Adhesives: Adhesives complying with ASTM C557 or ASTM D3498.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments
determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components,
including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation
sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and
trim.
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local
code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material
acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames,
securely attached to stud framing.
D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be
securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.
E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other
method of support is explicitly indicated.
F. Provide the following specific nonstructural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Wall-mounted door stops.
4. Chalkboards and marker boards.
5. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 06 1000
Renton Technical College ROUGH CARPENTRY
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 06 1000 - 3
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing;
space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Waste Disposal: See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-
energy” facilities.
B. Do not leave wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 07 8400
Renton Technical College FIRESTOPPING
Project No. 2022-511 G (2-1) Page 1 of 1
September 30, 2022 07 8400 - 1
SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Firestopping systems.
B. Firestopping of joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on
drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specifications sections, apply to this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2020.
B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems 2013a (Reapproved 2017).
C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products current edition.
D. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide current edition.
E. UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test
or design number.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in
accordance with methods indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for
tested firestopping assembly.
2.02 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use system that is listed by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), or UL (FRD) and tested in accordance with
ASTM E814, ASTM E119, or UL 1479 with F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum
T Rating Equal to F Rating and in compliance with other specified requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install labeling required by code.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 07 9200
Renton Technical College JOINT SEALANTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (2-1) Page 1 of 5
September 30, 2022 07 9200 - 1
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.
B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants.
C. Joint backings and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders.
C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
D. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Setting exterior door thresholds in sealant.
E. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
F. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings.
G. Section 23 3100 - Ducts and Casings for HVAC: Duct sealants.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a
Durometer 2015.
B. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.
C. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants 2017.
D. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications 2018.
E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.
F. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with Accessories
Used in Structural Glazing Systems 2016.
G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 2016.
H. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants 2018.
I. ASTM C1521 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant Joints 2019
(Reapproved 2020).
J. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness 2015, with Editorial Revision
(2017).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used, that includes
the following.
1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color
availability.
2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.
3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.
4. Substrates the product should not be used on.
5. Substrates for which laboratory adhesion and/or compatibility testing is required.
6. Sample product warranty.
B. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used,
including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools.
C. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard
colors available for selection.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 07 9200
Renton Technical College JOINT SEALANTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (2-1) Page 2 of 5
September 30, 2022 07 9200 - 2
D. Samples for Verification: Where custom sealant color is specified, obtain directions from Architect and submit at
least two physical samples for verification of color of each required sealant.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve watertight seal , exhibit loss
of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping.
1. Dow Chemical Company: consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html.
2. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
3. Master Builders Solutions by BASF: www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us/en-us.
4. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com.
5. Sonneborn, BASF Corp. Building System: www.BuildingSystems.BASF.com
2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS
A. Scope:
1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless specifically
indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.
a. Wall expansion and control joints.
b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
c. Joints between different exposed materials.
d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry.
e. Other joints indicated below.
2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed
include, but are not limited to, the following items.
a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
b. In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices, piping, and other
openings; between wall/ceiling and other construction; and other flanking sound paths.
c. Other joints indicated below.
3. Do not seal the following types of joints.
a. Intentional weepholes in masonry.
b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of sealing
device.
c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed.
d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.
e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.
B. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or "acoustical".
2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS
A. Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstand continuous water
immersion or traffic.
1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum.
2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in accordance with
ASTM C1248.
3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.
4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
B. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; not expected to withstand
continuous water immersion or traffic.
1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 35 percent, minimum.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 07 9200
Renton Technical College JOINT SEALANTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (2-1) Page 3 of 5
September 30, 2022 07 9200 - 3
C. Non-Sag "Traffic-Grade" Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component;
explicitly approved by manufacturer for continuous water immersion and traffic without the necessity to recess
sealant below traffic surface.
1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.
2. Hardness Range: 40 to 50, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.
3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; not
intended for exterior use.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2.04 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS
A. Semi-Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: Intended for expansion joints in sidewalks, swimming pool decks, plazas,
floors and other horizontal surfaces with up to 6 percent slope.
1. Composition: Single or multi-component.
2. Durometer Hardness, Type A: 35 to 45, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible with specific
sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application.
B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by
tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.
C. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.
C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that
sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material
installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.
E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on
adjacent surfaces.
F. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will
be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are
followed.
G. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling
sealant surface.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 07 9200
Renton Technical College JOINT SEALANTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (2-1) Page 4 of 5
September 30, 2022 07 9200 - 4
3.04 POST-OCCUPANCY
A. Post-Occupancy Inspection: Perform visual inspection of entire length of project sealant joints at a time that joints
have opened to their greatest width; i.e. at low temperature in thermal cycle. Report failures immediately and repair.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 1113
Renton Technical College HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 1113 - 1
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors.
C. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames.
D. Hollow metal borrowed lites glazing frames.
E. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Wood doors installed in hollow metal frames specified in this Section.
C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
E. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
F. Drawings for rough-in requirements for access control system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design 2010.
B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and
Frame Anchors 2011.
C. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames 2003
(R2009).
D. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100) 2017.
E. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and
Frames 2011.
F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2020.
G. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and Bake
Hardenable 2020.
H. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength 2018a.
I. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 2020.
J. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 2020.
K. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames 2016.
L. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017.
M. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products current edition.
N. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2002.
O. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2011.
P. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications For Receipt, Storage and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2007.
Q. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2018.
R. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2019.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 1113
Renton Technical College HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 1113 - 2
S. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2017.
T. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 2013.
U. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory Current Edition.
V. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
W. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and
locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, details of doors and frames,
including reinforcement and edges, details of wall openings, anchorages, accessories, joints and connections,
details of glazing and stops, and details of conduit and preparations for electrified door harware and controls, and
any indicated finish requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less
than three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years
of documented experience.
C. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on
factory applied painted finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
2. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle.
4. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.: www.hollowmetal.com
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with
ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled
(HRPO) steel complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each.
2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.
3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned.
4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.
5. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush.
6. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings.
Style: Manufacturers standard.
7. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and NAAMM HMMA
831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.
8. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated
(galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM
A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow
metal doors and frames.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 1113
Renton Technical College HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 1113 - 3
a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when necessary, coating not
required for typical interior door applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) for corrosive
locations.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of
requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also
indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated
doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.
1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
c. Model 1 - Full Flush.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.
2. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 6.0 minimum, for installed thickness of polystyrene.
3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal.
B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
c. Model 1 - Full Flush.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum.
2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal.
2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable
door frame requirements.
B. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM
A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
3. Face Width: 2 inches.
C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.
2. Face Width: 1.5 inches.
D. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding door.
E. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on
drawings.
F. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in exterior frames identified to be grouted.
G. Frames Wider than 48 inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Epoxy coating: High build, water resistant coating.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components ; factory-installed.
1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR) listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.
B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.
C. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for
countersink style tamper proof screws.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 1113
Renton Technical College HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 1113 - 4
D. Astragals and Edges for Double Doors: Pairs of door astragals, and door edge sealing and protection devices.
E. Mechanical Fasteners for Concealed Metal-to-Metal Connections: Self-drilling, self-tapping, steel with electroplated
zinc finish.
F. Grout for Exterior Frames: Mortar grout complying with ASTM C476 with maximum slump of 4 inches as measured
in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M for hand troweling in place; plaster grout and thinner pumpable grout are
prohibited.
G. Sound Deadening: Tightly fill perimeters of interior frames with mineral wool insulation.
H. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion
of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.
I. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be grouted with epoxy coating, prior to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door
and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Grout exterior frames using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not
deform frames.
E. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 1416
Renton Technical College FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 08 1416 - 1
SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CREATED BY LUX 2019-02-15
PART 1 GENERAL
2.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; non-rated.
2.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
E. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field finishing of doors.
2.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd Edition 2014, with Errata (2016).
B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1 2017, with Errata
(2019).
C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2019.
D. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
E. WDMA I.S. 1A - Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors 2013.
2.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for
hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.
2.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, with not
less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less
than three years of documented experience.
2.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging, and inspect for damage.
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic; do not store in damp or wet areas or areas
where sunlight might bleach veneer; seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week, and
break seal on site to permit ventilation.
2.07 WARRANTY
A. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials,
and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
3.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Lynden Door, Inc.: www.lydendoor.com..
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 1416
Renton Technical College FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 08 1416 - 2
2. Oshkosh Door Co.: www.oshkoshdoor.com.
3. Vancouver Door Company, Inc.: www.vancouverdoorco.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3.02 DOORS AND PANELS
A. Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at each location.
2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish as indicated on drawings.
3.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as indicated above;
with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.
3.04 DOOR FACINGS
A. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: White Maple, veneer grade in accordance with quality standard indicated,
plain sliced (flat cut), with book match between leaves of veneer, balance match of spliced veneer leaves assembled
on door or panel face.
1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.
2. "Pair Match" each pair of doors; "Set Match" pairs of doors within 10 feet of each other when doors are
closed.
B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
3.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware
requirements and dimensions.
D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with
specified quality standard.
E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
3.06 FINISHES - WOOD VENEER DOORS
A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade
specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 5, Varnish, Conversion.
b. Sheen: Satin.
B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
3.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: See Section 08 1113.
B. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof
screws.
C. Door Hardware: See Section 08 7100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
4.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 1416
Renton Technical College FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 08 1416 - 3
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
4.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
4.03 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
4.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 3100
Renton Technical College ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 08 3100 - 1
SECTION 08 3100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes access doors where indicated on the drawings and additional doors as necessary to permit
access to elements of the work provided in Divisions 20 through 28 that would otherwise be inaccessible for
operation and maintenance of that work. Scope includes access doors for existing and new equipment located
above acoustical tile ceilings, which for the purpose of this Contract are considered inaccessible. It is the
responsibility of the General Contractor to provide all necessary access doors of the following types, as specified
herein and to coordinate their location in the work:
1. Wall and ceiling access doors.
2. Ceiling access doors for installation in suspended metal grid ceiling system.
3. Fire-rated wall access doors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Coordinate locations with work of Divisions 20 through 28 to ensure that access doors are provided where
equipment is located be-hind wall or ceiling construction.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board walls and ceilings receiving access doors.
D. Section 09 5123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Suspended metal grid ceiling system receiving access doors.
E. Divisions 21 through 28: For mechanical and electrical equipment, devices, fittings, or fixtures requiring doors for
access.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications 2020a.
B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2014.
C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2015.
D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of each access door and/or panel unit.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each access unit.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years
documented experience.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and
indicate on schedule specified under "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES
A. Wall-Mounted Units in Wet Areas:
1. Panel Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
2. Size: 12 by 12 inches or 24 by 24 inches, as required for proper access.
3. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 3100
Renton Technical College ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 08 3100 - 2
4. Gypsum Board Mounting Criteria: Provide drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface.
B. Fire-Rated Wall-Mounted Units:
1. Wall Fire-Rating: As indicated on drawings.
2. Panel Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
3. Size: 12 by 12 inches or 24 by 24 inches, as required for proper access.
C. Ceiling-Mounted Units:
1. Panel Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
2. Panel Material - Lay-In Grid Ceilings: Aluminum.
3. Size - Lay-In Grid Ceilings: To match module of ceiling grid.
4. Size - Other Ceilings: 12 by 12 inches or 24 by 24 inches, as required for proper access.
5. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle.
2.02 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED ACCESS UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries: www.activarcpg.com/#sle.
2. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle.
3. Milcor, Inc: www.milcorinc.com/#sle.
4. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Wall and Ceiling Mounted Units: Factory fabricated door and frame, fully assembled units with corner joints welded,
filled and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with type of installation assembly
being used for each unit.
1. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.
2. Frames: 16 gauge, 0.0598 inch, minimum thickness.
3. Insulation: Non-combustible mineral wool or glass fiber.
4. Units in Fire-Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for fire-rated assembly that access
doors are being installed.
5. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 brushed finish.
6. Hardware:
a. Hardware for Fire-Rated Units: As required for listing.
b. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Continuous piano hinge.
c. Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch.
2.03 CEILING ACCESS UNITS FOR INSTALLATION IN METAL GRID CEILING SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers of Ceiling Access Doors for Installation in Suspended Metal Grid Ceiling System: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. The Williams Bros. Corporation of America: www.wbdoors.com.
a. Product: WB TB 1210 Aluminum Series Drop-In Ceiling Access Door.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
B. Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared, and if the responsibility of another installer,
notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to proceeding with this work.
B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for applicable substrates in accordance with project
conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 3100
Renton Technical College ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 08 3100 - 3
B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place.
C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 4313
Renton Technical College ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 39, 2022 08 4313 - 1
SECTION 08 4313 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.
C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site 2015.
B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document)
2015.
C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors
and Glazed Wall Sections 2009.
D. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix) 2017a.
E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures Most Recent Edition
Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
F. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2014.
G. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
2017.
H. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and
Tubes 2020.
I. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and
Tubes (Metric) 2013.
J. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 2014.
K. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 2000 (Reapproved 2016).
L. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic") 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners,
glass and infill, door hardware, and internal drainage details.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related work,
expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.
C. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations,
and dimensional limitations.
D. Samples for Verification: Actual samples of PVDF finish on aluminum substrate, matching specified color and sheen.
E. Designer's Qualification Statement.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered
with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years
of documented experience.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 4313
Renton Technical College ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 39, 2022 08 4313 - 2
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of
documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to
aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature
during and 48 hours after installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane
dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
C. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for
replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING
A. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken:
1. Use: All locations unless otherwise noted.
a. At Contractor's option, not thermally-broken framing may be used at interior portions of vestibules.
2. Basis of Design: Kawneer North America; Trifab VersaGlaze 451UT Framing System: www.kawneer.com..
3. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.
2.02 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT
A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related
flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing.
2. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back).
3. Finish: Superior performing organic coatings.
a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
4. Finish Color: As selected by Architect from full range of available standard and premium finishes.
5. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to
receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for
imposed loads.
6. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and
prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering
joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.
8. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling
temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12-hour period without causing detrimental effect to system
components, anchorages, and other building elements.
9. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to
components or deterioration of seals.
10. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing
expected movement.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind
loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 4313
Renton Technical College ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 39, 2022 08 4313 - 3
b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of
glazing materials.
c. See Structural General Notes S1.02 through S1.04 for site-specific loads.
2. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf.
3. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf pressure differential across assembly.
4. Condensation Resistance Factor of Framing: 50, minimum, measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.
5. Overall U-value Including Glazing: 0.32 Btu/(hr sq ft deg F), maximum.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from
exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.
2. Glazing Stops: Flush.
B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
D. Exposed Flashings: Aluminum sheet, 20 gage, 0.032 inch minimum thickness; finish to match framing members.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.
F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Superior Performing Organic Coatings System: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat superior performing
organic coatings system complying with AAMA 2605, including at least 70 percent PVDF resin, and at least 80
percent of aluminum extrusion and panels surfaces having minimum total dry film thickness (DFT) of 1.2 mils,
0.0012 inch.
1. Color: Match existing exterior hollow metal color.
2. Sheen: Satin.
B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.
C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with
adjacent work.
D. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
E. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria.
F. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.06 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 4313
Renton Technical College ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 39, 2022 08 4313 - 4
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.
B. Water-Spray Test: Owner’s testing agency will perform water spray quality test of installed storefront components in
accordance with AAMA 501.2 during construction process and before installation of interior finishes.
1. Perform a minimum of four tests, in locations selected by Architect. Selection will be made on day of tests.
2. Cooperate with Owner’s testing agency.
C. Repair or replace storefront components that fail designated field testing, and retest to verify performance complies
with specified requirements.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths, and take
care to remove dirt from corners and to wipe surfaces clean.
C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 1
SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project. Quantities listed are for
the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. Furnish items not specifically mentioned, but necessary
to complete the work, matching the items specified in quality and finish.
B. Electronic Hardware Coordination: Coordinate Work of this Section with the requirements of systems specified under
Division 26, as required to provide materials, fabrication, and installation for complete and operating system meeting
the operational requirements stated.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 08 1113 - Steel Doors and Frames.
C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.
D. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefront.
E. Division 26 Electrical Sections.
F. Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Standards: Current edition at date of bid.
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 - Materials and Finishes
2. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
3. NFPA 252 – Standard of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
4. Underwriters Laboratories - Building Materials Directory
5. UL 10C - Underwriters Laboratories, "Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies"
B. Codes:
1. WAC 51-50 – Washington State Building Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each item of Door Hardware.
B. Certificates: Submit certification of compliance with Supplier requirements (1.5.A. below) within Thirty days of notice
to proceed.
C. Hardware Schedule:
1. The submitted Door Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation of every item required for
each door or opening.
2. Furnish cover sheet listing title of project as shown on the Contract Documents, name, address, phone and
fax numbers of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and Supplier, name of Certified Hardware Consultant, and date
of submittal.
3. List each opening individually under separate headings in the same sequence as the door schedule. Do not
continue headings on separate pages.
4. Each heading shall indicate opening location, handing, degree of opening, door size, type, fire rating, and
Door and Frame material.
5. Indicate product Manufacturer and incorporate cross-reference to symbols used in Article 2.16, Hardware
Schedule.
6. Include a Key Schedule and index in the Finish Hardware submittals indicating door number, heading num-
ber, and locking function of each opening
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 2
7. Locations for all miscellaneous items shall be included.
8. A cross reference for any abbreviations or symbols used shall be included.
9. Schedules in coded or horizontal format are unacceptable.
10. Submittals not conforming to these requirements will be returned without review, for re-submittal. Following is
an example of the required format:
1 Sgl. Door #125A - West Corridor from Classroom 120 LH 90º
SC WD x HM
3 Each Butts (B2) HA BB1279 US26D (652) 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" x NRP x AMS
1 Classroom Lockset (L4) SA LC-8237 LW1L 630 LH
1 Mortise Cylinder (L4) ME 32W0200 626 x CT-Z20 Cam
1 Door Closer (C2) LCN 4040XP-EDA 689 x STB
1 Kick Plate (K2) TI B4EKP – 10 x 34" - US32D (630) x .050 x CTSK
1 Wall Stop (S1) TR 1270CX US26D (626)
1 Set Gasket (W1) NGP 2525C – 17' per set
11. Processing: Hardware schedules will not be reviewed by the Architect until they have been reviewed and ap-
proved by Contractor. Resubmit only corrected copies of those sheets requiring correction and update dis-
tributed copies with corrected sheets.
12. Revisions: The Door Hardware Submittal shall be kept current throughout the project duration. All revisions
incorporated shall be submitted in accordance with the above requirements. Submit only cover sheet and re-
vised pages. All revisions shall clearly identify changes from previous submittal content.
D. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit one sample of each exposed hardware category, finished as re-
quired, and tagged with full description for coordination with the hardware schedule. Samples will be reviewed, by
the Architect, for design and finish only, compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.
Units which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal procedures may be used on the project.
E. Color Samples: Submit six sets of color charts and physical samples of each product requiring color selection.
F. Key Schedule: Upon completion of the Key meeting submit a key schedule indicating the complete project key sys-
tem for approval. Obtain approval prior to proceeding with lock portion of the project.
G. Wiring Diagrams. Submit electronic hardware system riser and terminal-to-terminal wiring diagrams for each elec-
tronic hardware application, cross-referenced to the Door Hardware Submittal and Door Schedule. Include voltage
requirements, wire gauges and locations along with product data and installation instructions. Indicate connection
points to equipment provided under Divisions 26 and 28.
H. Operations and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit Maintenance and Operations Manuals under provisions of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals and
Procedures.
2. Manuals shall contain final copy of the Door Hardware Submittal, Product Data, Key Schedule, Installation
and Maintenance Instructions, and Wiring Diagrams.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier:
1. Recognized Door Hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a
period of not less than five (5) years.
2. Factory direct, authorized stocking distributor of the Exit Devices, Locksets and Door Closers.
3. Employing an Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified by the Door and Hardware Institute, who is availa-
ble during the course of the work to meet with the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware con-
sultation.
B. Source: Obtain each kind of Hardware (Hinges, Locksets, Exit Devices, Door Closers, etc.) from only one manufac-
turer.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 3
C. Installer: Door hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdic-
tions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site.
D. Automatic Operators:
1. The Operators and Accessories shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel, certified by
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM).
2. Certificates: Prior to substantial completion, provide certification from the local representative of the Automat-
ic Operators that Operator applications are installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
Submit certification in writing to the Owner in care of the Architect.
E. Templates: Furnish hardware templates for each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared
for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work to confirm that provisions
will be made for the proper installation of hardware.
F. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local and state building codes.
2. Comply with WAC 51-50, Chapter 11 Amendments to 2009 International Building Code for State of Washing-
ton accessibility requirements for persons with disabilities.
a. Comply with the requirements of ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2003, Accessible and Usable Building and Facil-
ities.
3. Fire Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by recog-
nized testing agency for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the requirements of
the door and door frame labels. Provide Door Closers, Automatic self latching bolts, coordinators, gasketing,
astragals, or other components if required to conform to label requirements.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Packaging: Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related to the final hardware schedule.
Basic installation instructions shall be included in the packages.
B. Storage: Provide a locked room at the jobsite for the storage of the hardware.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Door hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one year, backed
by a factory guarantee of the hardware manufacturer. The following products shall be guaranteed for periods beyond
One Year:
1. Locks: Two Years
2. Door Closers: Ten Years
3. Panic Devices: Three Years
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products may be furnished by the manufacturers listed under "As Specified" below, or equivalent products of type,
grade, design, and function, from manufacturers listed under "Acceptable Substitutions." Requests for products not
listed must be made in accordance with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
Product As Specified Acceptable Substitutions
Butt Hinges Hager Ives, Stanley
Continuous Hinges Select ABH
Locksets Sargent None
Cylinders and Interchangeable Cores Medeco None
Exit Devices Sargent None
Power Transfers ABH Von Duprin
Electric Lockset Modifications Architectural Control Systems None
Electric Exit Device Modifications Architectural Control Systems None
Power Supplies Architectural Control Systems None
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 4
Product As Specified Acceptable Substitutions
Door Closers LCN None
Automatic Operators LCN None
Wall Plate Actuators Camden Curran, Larco
Auto. Flush Bolts, Coordinators Ives Trimco
Kick & Mop Plates Tice Industries Trimco, Hager
Wall and Floor Stops Trimco Hager, Ives
Overhead Stop and Holders ABH Glynn Johnson
Electro-Magnetic Door Release ABH DynaLock, LCN
Weatherstrip & Thresholds National Guard Reese, Zero
2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips head fasteners, countersunk
oval, flat head, or undercut head as appropriate for material to be installed. Provide Door Closers and Exit Devices
applied to Wood Composite or Mineral Core Doors with Sex Bolts sized to the Thickness of the Door.
B. Compatibility: Provide fasteners which are compatible with both unit fastened and substrate, and which will not cause
corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material, or fastener.
2.3 FINISH
A. Finish in general shall be: US26D, Satin Chrome Plated, except:
1. Locksets, Exit Devices, Push Plates, Door Pulls, Overhead Stops: US32D, Satin Stainless Steel (BHMA
630).
2. Butt Hinges:
a. Exterior Hinges: US32D, Satin Stainless Steel (BHMA 630).
b. Interior Hinges: US26D, Satin Chrome over Steel Base (BHMA 652).
3. Door Closers:
a. Painted Aluminum (BHMA 689).
b. Aluminum Doors and Frames: As specified in Division 8 Section “Aluminum Entrances and Store-
front.
4. Kick, Mop and Armor Plates: US32D, Satin Stainless Steel (BHMA 630).
5. Smoke Gasketing: As Selected.
6. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum
7. Weatherstrip & Door Bottoms: Clear Anodized Aluminum
2.4 FULL MORTISE AND CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Types required are indicated as B1, B2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column B, and as described be-
low.
1. Quantity (per Leaf):
a. Door openings up to 60”: 2 each.
b. Door openings 60 to 90”: 3 each.
c. Doors over 90”: Furnish one additional for each 30” increment or fraction thereof.
d. Dutch Doors: 2 each per leaf.
2. Width of Hinges shall be as required to clear projecting trim or other conditions to allow maximum degree of
opening.
3. Hinges shall have non-removable pins (NRP – Set Screw in Barrel)
4. Hinges shall have Flat Button Tips.
5. For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size and quantity recommended by the hinge manufacturer.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number and Size
B1 Full Mortise, Standard Weight BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2"
B2 Full Mortise, Heavy Weight BB1168 4-1/2 x 4-1/2"
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 5
2.5 LOCKSETS AND CYLINDERS
A. Types required are indicated as L1, L2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column L, and as described be-
low.
1. Furnish all Mortise Lever Handle Locksets and Latches in LW1L Design
2. Backset: 2-3/4”
3. Cylinders:
a. Types: Medico Biaxial Level 6 Key Removable Interchangeable Cores.
b. Provide appropriate Cylinder Collars, Blocking Rings, and Cams as required for each application.
4. All Locksets and Latchsets shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for A label and lesser class doors.
5. Provide Knurled Lever where Lock Symbol is suffixed with “K” in the Hardware Schedule.
6. Provide Curved Lip Strikes with adequate projection to protect door trim. Provide flat, flush lip strikes for pairs
of doors with overlapping Astragals.
7. Provide manufacturers standard wrought or plastic strike boxes.
8. Coordinate Electric Strike locations, rough-in, and wiring requirements with Electrical Contractor.
9. Provide extended length top Rods for Flush Bolts mounted in doors exceeding 7’-6” in height to place flush
bolt at 6’-0” centerline above bottom of door.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number
L1 Entrance or Office Lockset 8205
Mortise Cylinder 32W0200
2.6 PANIC DEVICES AND FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
A. A. Types required are indicated as ED1, ED2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column L, and as described below.
1. Rated Openings: Provide UL listed Fire Exit Devices at rated openings.
2. Sizes: Provide Exit Devices sized in accordance with the manufacturer manufacturers recommendations.
3. Lever Trim: Exit Device Lever Trim shall match design specified under Article 2.4, Locksets and Cylinders.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number
ED1 Exit Device LD-8806 ETL
Mortise Cylinder – Outside 32W0200
Electric Latch Retraction Mod. RE1550-MDS-24VDC-AE
Electric Request-to-Exit Mod. RE1500-AE
Power Transfers PT1000
Power Supply 1451
Card Reader By Division 28
2.7 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Types required are indicated as C1, C2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column C, and as described
below.
1. Furnish drop plates where doors have insufficient height top rails, or where Regular Arm Door Closers are
used in conjunction with Concealed Overhead Stops.
2. Furnish cold weather fluid, at exterior & vestibule doors.
3. Furnish non-flammable hydraulic fluid at fire rated openings in conformance with UL Test Standard 10C.
4. Provide special closer mounting as required where interference with weatherstrip or sound seals occurs.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number
C1 Regular Arm 4040XP
2.8 KICK, MOP, AND ARMOR PLATES
A. Types required are indicated as K1, K2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column K, and as described be-
low.
1. Kick Plates shall be applied to the Push Side of the Door.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 6
2. Provide stainless steel Phillips oval/undercut head, full tread type sheet meal screws for fastening not more
than 5 inches on center.
3. Plates shall be .050 Stainless Steel, beveled four edges (B4E) with satin finish.
4. All plates shall be furnished with width as required to provide 1/4” clearance at sides of doors frame stops,
Mullions, Astragals, or Stop and Mullion applied seals.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number
K1 10” High Kick Plate B4EKP
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Types required are indicated as S1, S2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column S, and as described be-
low
1. Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish floor stops 1215CKU Series, or Overhead Stops if required.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number
S1 Convex Wall Stop 1270CX
S2 Floor Stop 1215CKU
2.10 THRESHOLDS
A. Types required are indicated as T1, T2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column T, and as described be-
low
1. Furnish Thresholds with 1/4-20 x 2” Phillips Flat Head Sleeve Anchors.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number
T1 Saddle Threshold, 1/2” High x 9” Wide 429E
2.11 WEATHERSTRIP AND SMOKE GASKETING
A. Types required are indicated as W1, W2, etc. under Hardware Schedule, Article 2.16, Column W, and as described
below
1. Furnish weatherstrip and gaskets for complete perimeter of opening, including mullions, and astragals.
2. Provide Rain Drips full frame width including frame faces.
Symbol Function Description Factory Number
W1 Self Adhesive Smoke Gasketing 2525C
W2 Rigid Jamb Weatherstrip 700S (Head) x 700ES (Jambs)
W3 Door Bottom Sweep 200NA
2.12 DOOR SILENCERS
A. Furnish Rubber Door Silencers for all openings not specified to have Smoke Gasketing or Weatherstrip.
B. Quantity: Furnish three for each single door frame, and four for each pair of door frames.
C. Type: Trimco 1229A.
2.13 KEYING
A. All Locksets and Cylinders specified under this Section shall be keyed to the existing Medeco Key System for Renton
Technical College.
B. Provide Brass Construction Cores and Keys during the construction period. Plastic Construction Cores are unac-
ceptable
C. The Door Hardware Supplier shall meet with the Owner to prepare the permanent keying schedule. Submit for ap-
proval in accordance with paragraph 1.4 F.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 7 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 7
D. The Permanent Cores, Change Keys, Master Keys, and Control Keys, prepared according to the approved keying
schedule, shall be transmitted directly from the manufacturer to the Owner, prior to substantial completion. The Con-
tractor shall remove the construction cores and install the permanent cores. The Temporary Cores shall be returned
to the Door Hardware Supplier by the Contractor.
E. All Permanent Cylinder and Keys shall be sent direct from the lock manufacturer via Registered Mail, Return Receipt
Requested.
F. Stamp all Keys "Do not Duplicate" and with change designation as directed.
G. Furnish:
1. Six Master Keys per Set
2. Four change keys per Lockset or Cylinder.
3. Six Construction Keys
2.14 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Hardware Schedule Notes:
Note 1: Coordinate location, rough-in, and voltage requirements for electronic hardware items with electrical contractor.
Butts Locks Closers Kick Plate Stops Threshold Weatherstrip Remarks
Door B L C K S T W
110.1 Existing
110.2 Existing
110A B1 L1 S1 W1
110B B1 L1 S1 W1
110C B1 L1 S1 W1
110D B1 L1 S1 W1
110E B1 L1 S1 W1
110F B1 L1 S1 W1
110G B1 L1 S1 W1
110H B1 L1 S1 W1
110I B1 L1 S1 W1
110J B1 L1 S1 W1
113A.1 Existing
115.1 Existing
115.2 B2 ED1 C1 K1 S2 T1 W2,3 Note 1
117 Existing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examination: Examine Doors, Frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application
and operation of the Door and Finish Hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.
B. Provide solid blocking for wall mounted components.
C. Provide blocking between Automatic Operator back plates and wall surface.
D. Fasteners: Check conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor hardware as per manufactur-
er's published templates. Self-tapping sheet metal screws are unacceptable, except where specifically listed under
Part 2 Products.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 8 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 8
A. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights as recommended in "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (2001)" by Doors and Hardware Institute, except as indicated below. Products
not specifically covered shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer templates and instructions.
1. Hinges:
a. Top Hinge: 7-1/4", Top of frame rabbet to centerline of hinge.
b. Bottom Hinge: 12-1/4", bottom of Frame to centerline of hinge
c. Intermediate Hinges: Centered, equal spacing between top and bottom hinges.
2. Mortise Lock Strikes: 40", bottom of frame to centerline of Strike.
3. Wall Stops: Locate Wall Stops intended for use with Lever Handle Locksets and Exit Devices at the Center-
line of the Spindle or Pull.
4. Automatic Operator Wall Switches: 36", finish floor to centerline of switch.
5. Push and Pull Plates: 42", bottom of Frame to centerline of Plate.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware surfaces which will be painted or finished at a
later time, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place. After completion of the
finishes, re-install each item.
2. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
3. Doors shall swing to the maximum degree of opening that the project conditions will allow. The swings indi-
cated on the floor plan are intended to depict direction only and do not indicate full degree of opening.
4. Fire Rated Openings: Install to comply with NFPA 80.
5. Exit Devices Trim Exit Devices to provide 1-1/2" clearance between End Cap and hinge jamb stop face, and
stop applied seals (where applicable).
6. Door Closers: Door Closers shall be located to allow maximum degree of opening that project conditions will
allow. Door Closer shall not be used to stop the door, except for models equipped with an integral stop-on-
the-arm feature.
7. Locate Overhead Stop and Holders provide maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow.
8. Locate Floors Stops at maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow. Do not locate Floor
Stops where they create a hazardous condition. Stops should be located no more than 1/3 Door width from
the latch edge of the Door.
9. Set all Exterior Thresholds in a bed of butyl rubber sealant in conformance with Division 7 requirements.
Remove excess sealant. Caulk edges and joints to exclude moisture.
10. Mount and adjust rigid jamb Weatherstrip prior to mounting Parallel Arm Door Closers. Weatherstrip shall be
installed to provide a continuous seal at head and jambs. Do not notch Weatherstrip for Door Closer shoe.
Provide Parallel Arm 5th hole spacer of increased thickness to allow for revised location.
11. Smoke Gasket: Thoroughly clean frame and install smoke gasketing is accordance with manufacturer’s in-
structions. Apply Gasket to stop face of Strike Jambs and Headers, and Door Rabbet of Hinge Jamb.
12. Astragals shall be applied to the Active leaf of out-swinging pair doors, and to the inactive leaf of in-swinging
pairs.
C. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to insure proper operation or function of every unit.
Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
3.3 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to acceptance or occupan-
cy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy.
Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Ad-
just door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment
B. Door Closer Adjustment: After mechanical systems have been balanced, adjust Door Closers to comply with follow-
ing ICC/ANSI A117.1 requirements, as modified by WAC 51-50 and the International Building Code:
1. Closing Speed: With the door open 90 degrees, the door closer shall be adjusted so that the door will take at
least five (5) seconds to move to a point where the leading edge of the door is 12 degrees from latching.
2. Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling a door open shall be as follows: (these forces do
not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices securing the door)
a. Fire Doors: The minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 7100
Renton Technical College DOOR HARDWARE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 9 of 9
September 30, 2022 08 7100 - 9
b. Exterior Doors: 10.0 lbf. (44.4N)
c. Interior Doors: 5.0 lbf. (22.2 N)
d. Automatic Doors: Comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1, 404.3.
3. Adjust backcheck to prevent damage to the closer, hardware, door and frame, and wall.
C. Instruction: Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 8000
Renton Technical College GLAZING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 8000 -1
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass.
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Steel doors and borrowed lights receiving glazing specified in
this Section.
C. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Storefront systems receiving glazing specified in this Section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and
Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015).
C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.
D. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016.
E. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass;
2012 (Editorial Change 1).
F. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014.
G. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.
H. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016.
I. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010.
J. ASTM F 2248 - Standard Practice for Specifying Equivalent 3-Second Duration Design Loading for Blast Resistant
Glazing Fabricated with Laminated Glass; 2015.
K. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
L. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
M. PDC-TR 10-02 - US Army Corps of Engineers Protective Design Center Technical Report (PDC-TR): Blast Resistant
Design Methodology for Window Systems Designed Statically and Dynamically; 19 April 2012.
N. UFC 4-010-01 - Unfied Facilities Criteria (UFC): DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings; 9 February
2012, Change 1, 1 October 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations,
special handling or installation requirements.
B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations,
special application requirements. Identify available colors.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size of each specified glazing type.
D. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Government's name and
registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 8000
Renton Technical College GLAZING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 8000 -2
documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of
failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc.: www.afgglass.com.
2. Guardian Industries Corp.: www.sunguardglass.com.
3. Pilkington North America Inc.: www.pilkington.com.
4. PPG Industries, Inc.: www.ppg.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C 1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design
regardless of specified thickness.
2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Energy-related performance criteria for insulating glass is based on:
a. PPG Industries, Inc.; "Solarban 60 Starphire + Starphire": www.ppg.com.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the basis-of-design product or an equal product of the
following manufacturers:
a. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc.: www.afgglass.com.
b. Guardian Industries Corp: www.guardian.com.
c. Pilkington North America Inc.: www.pilkington.com.
d. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
5. See Schedule for performance criteria.
2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to
20; black color; non-skinning.
2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for
each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit
glazing method and pane weight and area.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 8000
Renton Technical College GLAZING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 8000 -3
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x
one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer
hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
D. Glazing Gaskets: As specified in Section 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture
movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean all contact surface and wipe dry.
B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual and manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A. Application: Curtain wall systems.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact.
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact.
3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET GLAZING)
A. Application: Factory-glazed aluminum windows.
B. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl
sealant.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact.
E. Install removable stops containing integral gasket. Exert pressure for full continuous contact.
F. Trim protruding tape edge.
3.05 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)
A. Application: Interior doors and borrowed lights.
B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.
G. Knife trim protruding tape.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 08 8000
Renton Technical College GLAZING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 08 8000 -4
reflective glass units.
3.09 SCHEDULE
A. Glazing Type G1: Uncoated annealed float glass. Provide Kind HS (heat strengthened) where required to resist
thermal stresses.
1. Tint: Clear.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
B. Glazing Type G2: Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.
1. Tint: Clear.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
C. Glazing Type G3: Insulating glass. Provide at all exterior locations unless otherwise noted.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch panes, 1 inch overall.
2. Outboard pane: Clear, heat strengthened G1 or G2 as required, with Low-E coating on #2 surface.
3. Inboard pane: Clear G3.
4. Transmittance: 70% visible, 19% UV
5. Thermal Performance Requirements: See Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 0561
Renton Technical College COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
Project No. 2022-511 B (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 0561 - 1
SECTION 09 0561 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of floor
coverings:
1. Resilient tile and sheet.
2. Carpet tile.
B. Preparation of new concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.
C. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
D. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or alkalinity (pH) conditions.
1. Contractor is to assume that specified remediation will be required at all existing and new concrete surfaces.
All costs for remediation shall be included in the base bid Contract Price.
2. At Contractor's option, and at no additional cost to the Owner, remediation may be omitted subject to the
following:
a. A testing agency report showing actual moisture, adhesion, and flatness characteristics of the installed
concrete.
b. Letter of acceptance of conditions by flooring manufacturer's for moisture, adhession, and flatness.
c. Full warranties as specified in other sections is provided without conditions relating to concrete surfaces
or preparation.
E. Patching compound.
F. Remedial floor coatings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Limitations on curing requirements for new concrete floor slabs.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or
(50-mm) Cube Specimens) 2020b.
B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete
2020.
C. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using
Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 2016a.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours
prior to testing.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor
covering, and adhesive to be used; showing:
1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods.
2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.
B. Testing Agency's Report:
1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful.
2. Summary of conditions encountered.
3. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) test reports.
4. Copies of specified test methods.
5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces.
6. Submit report to Architect.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 0561
Renton Technical College COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
Project No. 2022-511 B (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 0561 - 2
7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.
C. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by
Contractor.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified.
1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required, with project Owner's
project contact information.
C. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:
1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.
2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.
3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.
4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.
5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will start.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to
testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to
testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible
with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a
product with the following characteristics:
1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and
floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges.
2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
3. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle.
b. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer
to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the
level of alkalinity (pH) found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment.
1. Thickness: As required for application and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX MC RAPID: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle.
b. Custom Building Products; TechMVC Moisture Vapor and Alkalinity
Barrier: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.
c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating with LATICRETE NXT Level
Plus: www.laticrete.com/#sle.
d. Maxxon Corporation; Aquafin SG2: www.maxxon.com/#sle.
e. Sika Corporation; Sikafloor Moisture Tolerance Epoxy Primer and Sikafloor Self-Leveling Moisture
Tolerant Resurfacer: www.sikafloorusa.com/#sle.
f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION
A. Perform following operations in the order indicated:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 0561
Renton Technical College COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
Project No. 2022-511 B (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 0561 - 3
1. Existing concrete slabs (on-grade and elevated) with existing floor coverings:
a. Visual observation of existing floor covering, for adhesion, water damage, alkaline deposits, and other
defects.
2. Preliminary cleaning.
3. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000
square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer.
4. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Alkalinity (pH) tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Specified remediation, if required.
7. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required.
8. Other preparation specified.
9. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.
10. Protection.
3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film-forming
curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that
might prevent adhesive bond.
B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
3.03 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this
specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this section.
C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.
D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as those methods
do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the
absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24
hours.
F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.04 ALKALINITY TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this
specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the
absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if alkalinity (pH) test value is over 10.
3.05 PREPARATION
A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.
B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other
irregularities with patching compound.
D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.06 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
3.07 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 0561
Renton Technical College COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
Project No. 2022-511 B (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 0561 - 4
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 2116
Renton Technical College GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 2116 - 1
SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Acoustic insulation.
C. Water-resistant gypsum board.
D. Gypsum wallboard.
E. Joint treatment and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing.
C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire-resistance-rated walls.
D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum board or plaster work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2020.
B. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board 2017.
C. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members 2018.
D. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing 2017.
E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
Panel Products 2020.
F. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 2020.
G. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal
Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness 2018.
H. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs 2020.
I. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base 2019.
J. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel 2018.
K. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2017.
L. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an
Environmental Chamber 2016.
M. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions and Elements 2009 (Reapproved 2016).
N. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2016.
O. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products 2016.
P. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers 2016, with Editorial Revision (2019).
Q. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.
B. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide independent
laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 2116
Renton Technical College GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 2116 - 2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each specified product specified from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide
gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or
design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum 3
years of experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the
current UL (FRD).
2.02 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.
3. USG Corporation: www.usg.com/#sle.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in
place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Resistance Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no
tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
C. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize
joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM
C1178/C1178M.
a. Regular Type: Thickness 1/2 inch.
b. Fire-Resistance-Rated Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch.
c. Products:
1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.
2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 2116
Renton Technical College GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 2116 - 3
2.03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 2 inch.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based non-curing
butyl sealant.
1. Products:
a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond GREENchoice Professional Acoustical Smoke and Sound
Sealant: www.titebond.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.
1. Architectural Reveal Beads:
a. Shapes: As indicated on drawings.
2. Expansion Joints:
a. Type: V-shaped metal with factory-installed protective tape.
D. Aluminum Accessories
1. Decorative Trim:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Fry Reglet Corp.: www.fryreglet.com.
2) Gordon, Inc.: www.gordongrid.com.
3) Pittcon Industries, Inc.: www.pittsonindustries.com.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
b. Material: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 temper.
c. Finish: Anodized, clear.
d. Type: Profile as selected from manufacturer's standard range.
E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.
F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inches in Thickness
and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion-resistant.
G. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM
C954; steel drill screws, corrosion-resistant.
H. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to
rigidly secure materials in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical
items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in
highly visible locations.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly
listing.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 2116
Renton Technical College GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 2116 - 4
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
D. Decorative Trim: Install at locations shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish and other areas specifically indicated.
2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.
3. Level 1: Fire-resistance-rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed
construction.
B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
2. Taping, filling, and sanding are not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and fixed
cabinetry.
3. Taping, filling, and sanding are not required at base layer of double-layer applications.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 2400
Renton Technical College CEMENT PLASTERING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 09 2400 - 1
SECTION 09 2400 - CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cement plaster patching of existing cement plaster exterior wall facing.
B. Repair materials including insulation, sheathing, and weather barrier.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specifications sections, apply to this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2018.
B. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
C. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster 2018b.
D. ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior Plastering 2006
(Reapproved 2019).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials and trim accessories.
B. Samples:
1. Submit two samples, 24 by 24 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATIONS
2.02 FACTORY PREPARED CEMENT PLASTER
A. Premixed One-Coat Base: Mixture of Type I Portland cement complying with ASTM C150/C150M, hydrated lime
complying with ASTM C207, fibers and other approved ingredients; install in accordance with ASTM C926.
B. Premixed Leveling Coat: Acrylic polymer-based blend approved for use with plaster manufacturer's base coat and
finish materials.
C. Premixed Finish Coating: Same product as base coat.
D. Primer: Acrylic, as recommended by coating manufacturer and compatible with plaster base coat.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Compound: Provide type recommended for bonding plaster to solid surfaces, complying with ASTM C932.
B. Reinforcing Mesh: 4.5 oz/sq yd alkali-resistant mesh.
C. Water Resistive Barrier for Patching Application: Compatible with existing barrier product. Include flashing at
storeront openings.
D. Gypsum Sheathing for Patching Application: Glass mat faced gypsum board; ASTM C1177/C1177M, square long
edges, 5/8 inch thick, Type X - Fire Resistant.
E. Thermal Insulation for Patching Application: Either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at
Contractor's option.
1. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit and
unfaced.
a. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136
b. Thickness: Full depth of wall cavity.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 2400
Renton Technical College CEMENT PLASTERING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 09 2400 - 2
2. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit;
unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
a. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Thickness: Full depth of wall cavity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install insulation, sheathing, and weather barrier to restore integrity of existing wall assemblies.
B. Remove loose, damaged or defective existing plaster along perimeter of areas to be patched. Apply bonding agent
to edges of existing plaster.
3.03 MIXING
A. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
B. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
C. Add air entrainment admixtures to each coat to provide 5 to 7 percent air entrainment.
D. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.
E. Protect mixtures from frost or freezing temperatures, contamination, and excessive evaporation.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and comply with ASTM C926.
B. Base Coats:
1. Follow guidelines in ASTM C926 and manufacturer's written installation instructions for moist curing base
coats and application of subsequent coats.
C. Leveling Coat:
1. Apply leveling coat to specified thickness.
2. Fully embed reinforcing mesh in leveling coat.
D. Finish Coats:
1. Cement Plaster:
a. Apply with sufficient material and pressure to ensure complete coverage of base to specified thickness.
b. Apply desired surface texture while mix is still workable. Finish to match surrounding area.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 3000
Renton Technical College CERAMIC TILE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 3000 - 1
SECTION 09 3000 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Porcelain tile for wall applications.
B. Transition accessories installed as part of tile installations.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers: For sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A108 /A118 /A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium);
Version 2011.1.
B. ANSI A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2012.
C. ASTM C 1178/C 1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel; 2013.
D. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; 2014.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and transition accessory specified.
B. Samples for Initial selection: For each grout color, from manufacturer's full range.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction indicated. Where
products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches square, mounted on
glass-mat water-resistant gypsum backing board, with grouted joints using product complying with specified
requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors selected by Architect.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
3. Transition accessories in 6-inch lengths.
D. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all ceramic mosaic tile products from a single manufacturer. For each color, grade,
finish, type, composition, and variety of tile, provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive,
and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply
with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or
edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting
tile.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 3000
Renton Technical College CERAMIC TILE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 3000 - 2
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Tile Manufacturer: The design for ceramic tile is based on products of Crossville
(www.crossvilleinc.com). Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the named manufacturer or
comparable products by the following:
1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Basis-of-Design Tile-Setting and Grouting Materials Manufacturer: The design for tile-setting and grouting materials,
unless otherwise indicated, is based on products of Custom Building Products (www.custombuildingproducts.com).
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the named manufacturer or comparable products by the
following:
1. Laticrete International, Inc.: www.laticrete.com.
2. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com.
2.02 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "SETTING
MATERIALS" and "GROUTING MATERIALS" Articles.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the
factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other
packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: Individual tiles or dot-mounted into sheets per manufacturer's standard. Face-mounted sheets are prohibited.
E. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with the following
requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Exposed vertical and horizontal (including wainscot cap) edges: Surface bullnose.
2.03 TRANSITION ACCESSORIES
A. Provide extruded aluminum transition strips, profile as indicated, with integral perforated anchoring leg for setting the strip
into the setting material.
1. Product: Schlüter-Systems L.P. (tel. 800-472-4588; www.schluter.com) "Schiene" product line or equivalent.
2. Finish: Satin clear anodized aluminum.
3. Height: As required to transition from the materials indicated in compliance with ADA standards and to protect tile
edges.
2.04 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials composed as follows, with physical properties equaling or exceeding
those required for thin-set mortars based on testing of medium-bed specimens according to ANSI A118.4:
1. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: A mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-latex styrene
butadiene rubber additive.
2. Product: Custom Building Products; Custom-Crete.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
2.05 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, composed as follows:
1. Factory-Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: A factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersable, ethylene
vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 3000
Renton Technical College CERAMIC TILE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 3000 - 3
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider.
2. Product: Custom Building Products; Polyblend.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically
approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
2.08 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce
mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within
flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar
items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter
in consultation with Architect.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are
incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances
specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill
cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been
blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken
from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at
Project site before installing.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without
interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting
pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully
grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets,
piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls,
and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area.
Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 3000
Renton Technical College CERAMIC TILE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 3000 - 4
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within tile sheets so that
individual sheets are not apparent in finished work.
E. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints,
where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3. Provide control joints full height at all inside corner and as indicated.
G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement
grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
3.04 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile in thinset mortar bed to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, per
TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.
1. Walls with Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: TCNA W245.
B. Joint Widths: 3/16 inch.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing
fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise
defective tile work.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.06 GLAZED TILE WALL INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Glazed Wall Tile (CT-1) at all locations indicated:
1. Manufacturer and style: Crossville “Swatches.”
2. Size: 2 x 8 inch nominal.
3. Thickness: 8 mm.
4. Color: “Stone” – NEC03.
5. Surface Finish: Satin.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 5100
Renton Technical College ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 5100 - 1
SECTION 09 5100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical units for installation in metal grid.
C. Trim and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Access panels in metal grid ceiling system.
C. Section 21 1313 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler System: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
D. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
E. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control System: Lighting control devices in ceiling.
F. Section 26 5119 - LED Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
G. Section 28 3100 - Fire Detention and Alarm Systems: Fire alarm system devices in ceiling.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures Most Recent Edition
Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
B. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 2017.
C. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panels 2013.
D. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in
Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions 2020.
E. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products 2019.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.
B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.
C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and
after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 5100
Renton Technical College ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 5100 - 2
1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: The design is based upon products from the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
2. Other Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the specified product requirements, provide
comparable products by one of the following unless otherwise indicated.
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. USG: www.usg.com.
c. Rockfon: www.rockfon.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Suspension Systems:
1. Same as for acoustical units.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Ceiling systems designed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE 7 for Seismic Design Category D, E, or F and complying with the following:
1. Local authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
B. Acoustical Panels ACT-1: Painted mineral fiber, with the following characteristics:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong Ultima.
2. Classification: ASTM E1264 Type III.
3. Size: 24 by 24 by 3/4 inches.
4. Panel Edge: Square.
5. Color: White.
6. Humidity Resistance: Treated to prevent sagging under humid conditions.
7. Suspension System: 9/16 inch exposed grid, Color White.
2.04 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components,
with perimeter moldings, hold down clips, stabilizer bars, clips, and splices as required.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and
ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B. Hanger Wire: 12 gauge, 0.08 inch galvanized steel wire.
C. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips to suit application.
D. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard beam end retaining clips for seismic conditions and to suit application.
E. Perimeter Moldings: Same metal and finish as grid.
1. Shadow-style molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
2. Exposed Flange Width: 9/16 inch.
F. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with suspended
ceiling system.
G. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
H. Roller Shade Pocket: Three-sided aluminum pocket for recessed mounting of roller shades. Provide end closures.
1. Product: Armstrong Axiom Shade Pocket or equivalent.
2. Size: As required for roller shades specified in Section 12 2400.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 5100
Renton Technical College ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 5100 - 3
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM
E580/E580M, ASTM C636/C636M, and ASTM E580/E580M and as supplemented in this section.
1. Miter slotted suspension grid members as necessary to maintain aesthetic continuity to slots.
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360.
C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
D. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
E. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
F. Seismic Suspension System, Seismic Design Categories D, E, F: Hang suspension system with grid ends attached
to the perimeter molding on two adjacent walls; on opposite walls, maintain a 3/4 inch clearance between grid ends
and wall.
G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and
related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection
capability.
I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components
independently.
J. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6530
Renton Technical College RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6530-1
SECTION 09 6530 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes resilient wall base and accessories.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated, provide actual samples from manufacturer's full
range.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90
deg F.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Resilient Wall Base (RB):
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (www.armstrong.com).
2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products (www.mercerproducts.com).
3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. (www.flexcofloors.com).
4. Roppe Corporation (www.roppe.com).
2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of available colors.
2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized).
2. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous)
3. Style: Cove (with top-set toe).
4. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
5. Height: 4 inches.
6. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
7. Outside Corners: Job formed.
8. Inside Corners: Job formed.
9. Surface: Smooth.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories
1. Description: Reducer strips for resilient floor coverings for glue-down applications.
2. Material: Rubber.
3. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated or required.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6530
Renton Technical College RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6530-2
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement
based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions
indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture
content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections
and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere
with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in
advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in
rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal
and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration
(whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to
length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base
thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped
notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to
produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each
piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6530
Renton Technical College RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6530-3
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6540
Renton Technical College LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6540 - 1
SECTION 09 6540 - LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Linoleum tile floor coverings.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section 09 6530 - Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Resilient wall base and accessories.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern
of linoleum floor covering required.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
C. Maintenance Data: For linoleum floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in techniques required
by manufacturer for floor covering installation indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer
for installation techniques required.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method
indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures
maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in
spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 72 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 72 hours after installation.
B. After post installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg
F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during and for 72 hours after floor covering installation.
D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: www.armstrong.com.
2. Forbo Industries, Inc.: www.forbo-flooring.com
3. Tarkett: www.tarkett.com.
B. Color and Pattern:
1. RF-1: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line.
C. Tile Floor Covering: ASTM F 2034.
1. Tile Size: 10 x 20 inch nominal.
D. Thickness: 0.10 inch.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6540
Renton Technical College LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6540 - 2
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.
2.02 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement
based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor covering manufacturer for products and substrate conditions
indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content,
and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that
substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of
floor coverings.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain
soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of
installation.
1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning,
examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
B. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor
coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking device.
D. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed
installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other
surface imperfections.
3.04 TILE FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION
A. Install tile floor coverings per manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows:
1. Lay out joints square to structure and established reference lines.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6540
Renton Technical College LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6540 - 3
2. Field tiles shall be installed with directional arrows on back aligned in the same direction, or may be installed in
quarter-turned fashion.
3. Minimize number of seams; place seams at least 6 inches away from flooring edges.
4. Check cartons for and do not mix dye lots.
5. Adhesives: Adhere flooring to substrate using the full spread method resulting in a completed installation without
gaps, voids, raised edges, bubbles or any other surface imperfections.
a. Select appropriate adhesive, trowel and follow manufacturer's instructions.
b. Periodically spot-check transfer of adhesive to back of tile during installation.
c. Roll floor with a 100 pound roller to ensure proper transfer of adhesive and bonding.
d. Protect floor from traffic per manufacturer's instructions.
e. Do not wet mop floor until the adhesive has properly set per written instructions.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing floor coverings:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect floor coverings against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement
of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free of soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes.
a. Seal linoleum as recommended by manufacturer but with not less than two coats of floor polish.
b. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.
c. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover linoleum floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.
a. Allow drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear before Substantial
Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor covering surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over
floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving
panels.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6813
Renton Technical College TILE CARPETING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6813 - 1
SECTION 09 6813 – TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes carpet tile and installation (Room Finish Schedule designations: CPT-1, CPT-2, and CPT-3).
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section 09 6513 - Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2016
B. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat
Energy Source; 2017a.
C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2015.
D. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat En-
ergy Source; 2015.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics,
durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods.
B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with
manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-long Samples.
C. Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and man-
ufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can
demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2,
as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient tem-
perature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended
use.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have
under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warran-
ties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile
that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include de-
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6813
Renton Technical College TILE CARPETING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6813 - 2
terioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include,
but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than
10 sq. yd.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE:
A. CPT-1: Provide one of the following products:
1. Interface; Color / pattern TBD: www.interface.com.
2. J+J Flooring Group; Color / Pattern TBD: www.jjflooringgroup.com.
3. Shaw Contract; Color / Pattern TBD: www.shawcontract.com.
B. CPT-2: Provide one of the following products:
1. Interface; Color / pattern TBD: www.interface.com.
2. J+J Flooring Group; Color / Pattern TBD: www.jjflooringgroup.com.
3. Shaw Contract; Color / Pattern TBD: www.shawcontract.com.
C. CPT-3: Provide one of the following products:
1. Interface; Color / pattern TBD: www.interface.com.
2. J+J Flooring Group; Color / Pattern TBD: www.jjflooringgroup.com.
3. Shaw Contract; Color / Pattern TBD: www.shawcontract.com.
D. Construction: Commercial grade carpet with the following characteristics:
1. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA
253.
2. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D 2859 (the “pill” test).
3. VOC Content: Provide CRI (GLP) certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report showing com-
pliance is acceptable.
4. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated,
that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufac-
turer.
1. VOC Content Limit: 50 g/L
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalini-
ty range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Verify that substrates and
conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation and comply with requirements specified.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile manufacturer's writ-
ten installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by car-
pet tile manufacturer.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 6813
Renton Technical College TILE CARPETING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 09 6813 - 3
C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After cleaning, examine
substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory condi-
tions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)."
B. Installation Method: Glue-down; install every tile with releasable adhesive.
C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets,
pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufactur-
er.
D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves,
and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish
flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet
tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the
remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manu-
facturer.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 9000
Renton Technical College PAINTING AND COATING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 9000 - 1
SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish all interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied
primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment.
5. Glass.
6. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2014.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd
enamel"). Include VOC content and special surface preparation procedures.
2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available
for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finish was used,
product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up
procedures, repair of painted and coated surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum 3 years
experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage,
surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in
ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 9000
Renton Technical College PAINTING AND COATING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 9000 - 2
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the
paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture
in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.
B. Paints:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co; Natura product line for general applications: www.benjaminmoore.com.
2. Rodda; Cloverdate Ecologic product line for general applications: www.roddapaint.com.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company; Harmony product line for general applications: www.sherwin-williams.com.
a. Basis-of-Design Product for Hollow Metal Frames and Trim: Pro Industrial Acrylic.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Provide manufacturer's best-quality architectural-grade zero-VOC paint material of the various coating types
specified. If zero-VOC is not available for specific coating types, provide low-VOC coatings complying with
requirements established herein.
B. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a
homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks
or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production
run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically
described in manufacturer's product instructions.
C. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats; where the
manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the
manufacturer.
D. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Acrylic, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of 100% acrylic enamel.
B. Paint MgE-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Acrylic, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of 100% acrylic enamel.
C. Paint WE-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Acrylic, 3 Coat:
1. One coat primer. Spot prime existing.
2. Flat: Two coats 100% acrylic enamel.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 9000
Renton Technical College PAINTING AND COATING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 9000 - 3
2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with latex primer.
2. Satin: Two coats of 100 percent acrylic enamel .
B. Paint MgI-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Satin: Two coats of 100 percent acrylic enamel .
C. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
2. Eggshell at Walls: Two coats of 100 percent acrylic enamel.
3. Flat at Ceilings: Two coats of 100 percent acrylic enamel.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and
clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial
quality.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may
potentially affect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture
content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the
substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse
with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects
after repair.
G. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of
etching primer.
H. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and
rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting;
clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts
are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
I. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 09 9000
Renton Technical College PAINTING AND COATING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 09 9000 - 4
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint
separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next
coat.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
H. For low-hide colors, apply additional coats than specified if needed to produce a uniform opaque finish.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from
site.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULE - COLORS
A. PT-B1 - Match Benjamin Moore No. OC-65 "Chantilly Lace" (a.k.a. Super White).
1. Application: General use on interior walls, soffits, and ceilings.
B. PT-A1 - Match Benjamin Moore TBD.
1. Application: Interior accent walls.
C. PT-S1 - Match Benjamin Moore TBD
1. Application: Interior metals including hollow metals doors and frames.
D. PT-S2 - Match existing.
1. Application: Exterior metals including hollow metals doors and frames.
E. PT-E1 - Match existing.
1. Application: Exterior plaster walls and soffits.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 10 1100
Renton Technical College VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 10 11 00- 1
SECTION 10 1100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Porcelain enamel markerboards (MB).
B. Linoleum tackable surfacing, field applied and frameless (TS).
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A135.4 (AHA A 135.4) - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2012.
B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
C. ASTM A 424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a (Reapproved 2016).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board indicated.
1. Show location of panel joints.
2. Include sections of typical trim members.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Actual Samples from manufacturer's full range of available colors and textures. Where
finishes involve normal color and/or texture variations, include Samples sets showing the full range of variations
expected.
1. Porcelain-enamel face sheet.
2. Linoleum tackable surface.
3. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces, to include in maintenance manuals
4. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display boards through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site two weeks prior to installing linoleum tackable
surfacing. Comply with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. Review methods and procedures related to
product installation, including
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special porcelain enamel chalkboard warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace
porcelain enamel boards that do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or
exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking within the specified warranty period, provided the manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, installation, protection, and maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period: Life of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. (www.claridgeproducts.com).
2. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. (www.ghent.com).
3. PolyVision Corporation, Div. of Steelcase (www.polyvision.com).
4. Platinum Visual Systems, Div. of ABC School Equipment, Inc. (www.pvusa.com).
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 10 1100
Renton Technical College VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 10 11 00- 2
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 424, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous finish.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.
C. Steel Sheet Backing: Manufacturer's standard thickness, galvanized.
D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two sides).
E. Linoleum Tackable Surface: Seamless, homogenous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil,
rosin binders, and dry pigments mixed and calendared onto natural jute backing; with integral color throughout.
F. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L.
2.3 PRODUCTS
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards (MB): Factory-built units consisting of balanced, high-pressure-laminated, porcelain
enamel boards of 3-ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing.
1. Face Sheet: 24 gauge steel with porcelain enamel coating.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
2. Core: 0.375 inch particleboard.
3. Backing: Sheet steel of gauge required for balanced construction.
4. Metal Trim & Accessories
a. Trim: Manufacturer's standard trim with no visible fasteners or exposed joints. Fabricate from
minimum 0.062-in-thick extruded aluminum alloy in profiles to suit type of installation. Miter corners
to a neat, hairline closure.
b. Chalktray: At bottom of each markerboard, provide manufacturer's standard full-length extruded
aluminum chalktray with cast aluminum end closures.
c. Maprail: At top of each markerboard, provide manufacturer's standard full-length extruded aluminum
map rail, approximately 1 inch wide, with one standard map clip per foot of markerboard, end stops,
and continuous linoleum tackable surface insert.
i. Linoleum Tackable Surface Insert: Match product used for Linoleum Tackboards.
5. Mounting: Concealed cleat system.
C. Linoleum Tackable Surfacing (TS): 0.250 inch linoleum tackable surface, field-applied to smooth wall surface.
Where wall surface is exposed masonry, first laminate to hardboard backing as specified for Linoleum Tackboards.
1. Linoleum Product:
a. Forbo "Marmoleum Surface Solutions Bulletin Board."
b. Substitution: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES
B. Class II Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A31 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.4 mils thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine wall surfaces, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
installation of visual display boards.
1. Surfaces to receive visual display boards shall be free of dirt, scaling paint, and projections or depressions
that would affect smooth, finished surfaces.
2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Unroll linoleum tackable surfacing and allow to relax to flat at minimum 48 hours in advance of installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 10 1100
Renton Technical College VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 10 11 00- 3
A. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Keep
perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim,
and accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Coordinate Project-site-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
C. Coordinate rough opening dimension for recessed units prior to installation. Do not install until all opening are
properly sized and located.
D. Install linoleum tackable surfacing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide reveal joints indicated on
drawings.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function properly.
B. Clean units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 10 1400
Renton Technical College SIGNAGE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 10 1400 - 1
SECTION 10 1400 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Room and door signs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply top this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities;
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines current edition.
B. ADA Standards - 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010.
C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground
and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
B. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room
number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors.
1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the drawing room number on
schedule.
2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through
Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule.
3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style,
font, and method of attachment.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.
B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.
C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flat Signs:
1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com/#sle.
2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com/#sle.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1, unless otherwise
indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.
B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors,
lobbies, and similar open areas.
1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.
2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 10 1400
Renton Technical College SIGNAGE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 10 1400 - 2
3. Character Height: 1 inch.
4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Office Doors: Identify with the room numbers indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for
replaceable occupant name.
6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with the room numbers indicated on drawings; in addition, provide
"window" section with sliding "In Use/Vacant" indicator.
7. Service Rooms: Identify with the room names and numbers indicated on drawings.
8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "ALL GENDER", and braille.
2.03 SIGN TYPES
A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.
1. Edges: Square.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Clear Cover: For customer produced sign media, provide clear cover of polycarbonate plastic, glossy on
back, non-glare on front.
4. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.
B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:
1. Character Font: Match Renton Technical College standard.
2. Character Case: Upper and lower case (title case).
3. Background Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Character Color: Contrasting color.
2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA
A. Applied Character Panels: Acrylic plastic base, with applied acrylic plastic letters and braille.
1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch.
2. Letter Thickness: 1/8 inch.
3. Letter Edges: Square.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal.
B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
C. Protect from damage until Date of Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 10 4400
Renton Technical College FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 10 4400 - 1
SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide color and finish, anchorage details, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries; Cosmic Extinguisher - Multipurpose
Chemical: www.activarcpg.com/#sle.
2. Oval Brand Fire Products; Oval Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher - Multipurpose
ABC: www.ovalfireproducts.com/#sle.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries; Embassy Series: www.activarcpg.com/#sle.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Occult Series: www.larsensmfg.com/#sle.
3. Potter-Roemer; Dana Series: www.potterroemer.com/#sle.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is
more stringent.
1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL (DIR) or FM (AG) for purpose specified and as indicated.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Cabinet Construction: Non-fire rated.
1. Formed galvanized steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type.
1. Size to accommodate accessories.
2. Trim: Trimless with hidden flange.
C. Door: 0.036 inch metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon catch. Hinge doors for 180 degree
opening with two butt hinges.
D. Door Glazing: Tempered glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick, and set in resilient channel glazing gasket.
E. Door Handle: One-piece cast handle with red enamel finish and raised contrasting color text "FIRE."
F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of anchors.
G. Fabrication: Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
H. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: No.4 - Brushed stainless steel.
I. Finish of Cabinet Interior: Black colored enamel.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 10 4400
Renton Technical College FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 10 4400 - 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 2400
Renton Technical College WINDOW SHADES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 12 2400 - 1
SECTION 12 2400 - WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior manual roller shades.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All
Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
B. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films 2019.
C. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products Current Edition.
D. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets, including materials, finishes,
fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details, head, jamb and sill details,
mounting dimension requirements for each product and condition, and operation direction.
C. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and operation and
maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings.
E. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum five years of documented
experience with shading systems of similar size and type.
1. Manufacturer's authorized representative.
2. Factory training and demonstrated experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening.
B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's warranty from Date of Substantial Completion, covering the following:
1. Shade Hardware: Ten years.
2. Fabric: Ten years.
3. Aluminum and Steel Coatings: Ten years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 INTERIOR MANUALLY OPERATED ROLLER SHADES:
A. Draper, Inc; Clutch Operated FlexShade: www.draperinc.com/#sle.
B. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc; Contract Roller Manual Roller Shades: www.lutron.com/#sle.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 2400
Renton Technical College WINDOW SHADES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 12 2400 - 2
C. MechoShade Systems LLC; Mecho/5 System: www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
D. SWFcontract, a division of Springs Window Fashions, LLC.: www.swfcontract.com/#sle.
2.03 ROLLER SHADES
A. General:
1. Provide shade system components that are easy to remove or adjust without removal of mounted shade
brackets.
2. Provide shade system that operates smoothly when shades are raised or lowered.
3. Motorized Shades: Motor system housed inside roller tube, controlling shade movement via motor controls
indicated; listed or recognized to UL 325.
a. Comply with NFPA 70.
b. Electrical Components: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Where
applicable, system components to be FCC compliant.
c. Motors: Size and configuration as recommended by manufacturer for the type, size, and arrangement of
shades to be operated; integrated into shade operating components and concealed from view; fully
compatible with controls to be installed.
B. Roller Shades for Manual Operation:
1. Description - Interior Roller Shades: Single roller, manually operated fabric window shade system complete
with mounting brackets, roller tubes, hembars, hardware, and accessories.
a. Mounting: Window jamb mounted - outside, on face of jambs.
b. Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting indicated and to
accommodate shade fabric roll-up size and weight.
a. Material: Stamped steel.
3. Roller Tubes: As required for type of shade operation.
4. Hembars: Designed to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat.
5. Manual Operation for Interior Shades:
a. Clutch Operator: Manufacturer's standard material and design, permanently lubricated.
b. Drive Chain: Continuous loop beaded ball chain, 95 pounds minimum breaking strength. Provide upper
and lower limit stops.
6. Accessories:
a. Fascia: Removable extruded aluminum fascia, size as required to conceal shade mounting, attachable
to brackets without exposed fasteners; baked enamel finish. Provide at roller shades installed at exterior
glazing. Do not provide at roller shades installed in hollow metal sidelights.
1) Fascia to be capable of installation across two or more shade bands in one piece.
2) Color: Clear anodized.
3) Profile: Square.
2.04 SHADE FABRIC
A. Fabric: Nonflammable, color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its shape under normal
operation.
1. Manufacturers:
a. MechoShade Systems LLC; EcoVeil Screens - 0950 Series (1% open): www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2. Material: Polyester with acrylic backing.
3. Material Certificates and Product Disclosures:
a. Low-Emitting Material Certification: Greenguard Gold certified and listed in UL (GGG).
4. Performance Requirements:
a. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large and small tests.
5. Openness Factor: 2 percent.
6. Roll Width: 96 inches.
7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 2400
Renton Technical College WINDOW SHADES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 12 2400 - 3
2.05 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
B. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.
1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom bar and window
stool.
2. Horizontal Dimensions - Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using mounting devices as
indicated.
B. Adjust level, projection, and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of shade
fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 3550
Renton Technical College INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 6
September 30, 2022 12 3550 - 1
SECTION 12 3550 - INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets.
B. Plastic-laminate countertops.
C. Cabinet hardware and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for anchoring casework.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Reinforcements in gypsum board partitions for anchoring casework.
D. Section 09 6530 - Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Resilient base applied to casework.
E. Division 22 Sections for plumbing work associated with casework.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009.
C. ASTM D5751 - Standard Specification for Adhesives Used for Laminate Joints in Nonstructural Lumber Products;
1999 (Reapproved 2012).
D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
E. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association;
2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
F. GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision A,
1996.
G. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer
Association; 2009.
H. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
I. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National Hardwood Lumber
Association; 2003.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including bottoms of cabinets
more than 48 inches above floor, tops of cabinets less than 78 inches above floor or visible from upper building
level, and surfaces visible in open cabinets or behind glass doors.
B. Semi-Exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as interiors of cabinets, shelves, dividers,
interiors and sides of drawers, and interior faces of doors. Tops of cases 78 inches or more above floor are defined
as semi-exposed.
C. Concealed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust
panels, toe spaces receiving resilient base, underside of countertops, and ends and backs that are placed directly
against walls or other cabinets.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for institutional casework. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate locations of all countertop joints, and whether such joints
are shop- or field-installed.
C. Samples for Verification: 6-inch- square Samples for each type of finish and substrate of the following cabinet
components:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 3550
Renton Technical College INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 6
September 30, 2022 12 3550 - 2
1. Countertop showing top, front edge, and backsplash construction.
2. Adjustable shelf, including finished edges and shelf bracket.
3. Door, including two adjoining finished edges, hinge, and pull.
4. Melamine-faced particleboard, including finished edge.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum
five years of documented experience.
B. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Premium
Quality.
C. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of institutional casework manufacturer, with minimum five
years’ experience in casework installation and maintenance of a similar scale and scope to this Project.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain institutional casework through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install institutional casework until building is enclosed, wet work and
mechanical/electrical rough-in is complete, painting is complete in installation areas, and HVAC system is operating
and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
B. Field Measurements: Where institutional casework is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabricating institutional casework without field measurements. Coordinate
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of wall framing, blocking and other reinforcements for support of institutional
casework.
B. Coordinate rough-in and trim-out of mechanical and electrical services mounted to or within institutional casework.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
institutional casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.
2. Warping of components.
3. Failure of operating hardware.
4. Deterioration of finishes.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Institutional Casework:
a. Beck Cabinet Company: www.beckcabinet.com.
b. Custom Source Woodworking Inc.: www.cswwinc.com.
c. Genothen Holdings LLC: www.genothen.com.
d. Institutional Casework Inc.: www.iciscientific.com
e. Northwestern Design: www.nwdoregon.com
f. Pacific Cabinets: www.pacificcabinets.com.
g. Select Euro Systems: www.selecteurosystems.com.
h. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 3550
Renton Technical College INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 6
September 30, 2022 12 3550 - 3
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
a. For site-applied adhesives and glues, limit VOC content to 30 g/L.
2. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.
3. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particle core unless otherwise indicated, made without
urea formaldehyde.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, medium-density moisture-resistant particleboard
bonded with phenolic resins.
5. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
6. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard as indicated and finished with thermally fused,
melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
7. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
8. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick.
B. Exposed Cabinet Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Type VGS, unless otherwise noted.
C. Semi-exposed Cabinet Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Type VGS or HLS, as determined by color matching requirements.
2. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard with decorative surface of thermally fused,
melamine-impregnated web and complying with LMA SAT-1.
D. Concealed Cabinet Materials:
1. Solid Wood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility.
2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood.
3. Plastic Laminate: Type BKL.
E. Countertop Materials
1. Core: Medium-density fiberboard or particleboard.
2. Plastic Laminate: Type HGS at exposed surfaces, Type BKL at concealed surfaces.
F. Adhesives
1. Polyvinyl acetate (PVA) or aliphatic adhesive, ASTM D5751, Type II unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thermoplastic synthetic resins (hot melt).
2.03 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH
A. Design: Provide institutional casework of the following design:
1. Flush overlay with wire pulls.
B. Melamine-Faced Particleboard Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Satin Grey.
C. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:
1. Exposed Portions of Cabinets:
a. Casework: PLAM-1; Wilsonart; "Slate Grey" matte finish, No. D91-60 (www.wilsonart.com).
b. Countertops: PLAM-2; Wilsonart; "Pewter Mesh" fine velvet finish, No. 4878-38 (www.wilsonart.com).
2. Semi-Exposed Portions of Cabinets: Satin Grey to match melamine-faced particleboard.
D. Edgebanding Colors and Finishes:
1. PVC:
a. Exposed and Semi-Exposed Portions of Cabinets: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full
range of available finishes.
2.04 CABINET FABRICATION
A. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Cabinet Construction:
1. Joinery: Join fixed case body members (including fixed shelves and dividers) with concealed dadoes, dowels,
or European assembly screws. Where dadoes or dowels are used, assemble joints using glue and pressure.
Reinforce dadoes with blind nails or screws. At dowelled or screwed joints, rabbet pieces to be joined. Visible
fasteners are not permitted on exposed surfaces. At semi-exposed surfaces provide plastic trim caps,
matching the color of adjoining finishes, on visible fasteners.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 3550
Renton Technical College INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 6
September 30, 2022 12 3550 - 4
2. All unrestrained plastic-laminate-faced panels must be of balanced construction.
3. Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, and Tops of Wall Cabinets, with One or More Exposed Faces: Nominal
3/4-inch particleboard, plastic-laminate-faced on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
4. Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, and Tops of Wall Cabinets, without Exposed Faces: 3/4-inch particleboard,
melamine-faced.
5. Shelves: 3/4-inch particleboard, plastic-laminate-faced on both sides. Use 1-inch material for shelves with
spans exceeding 36 inches. For adjustable shelves, provide edgebanding on front and back edges.
6. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Drill ends of cabinets with 5mm diameter holes on 32mm centers, full height, in
depth to fully seat supports. Allow four shelf supports for shelves up to 30 inches deep and six shelf supports
for shelves 30 inches and deeper.
7. Backs of Cabinets: 1/2-inch particleboard, plastic-laminate-faced on exposed surfaces, melamine- faced on
semi-exposed surfaces.
8. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch particleboard, plastic-laminate-faced on both sides.
9. Drawer Sides and Backs: 1/2-inch plywood plastic-laminate-faced on both sides, with glued dovetail or
multiple-dowel joints.
10. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch plywood plastic-laminate-faced on both sides, glued and dado into front, back, and
sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch material for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
11. Doors: 3/4-inch particleboard or medium-density fiberboard, plastic-laminate-faced on both sides.
B. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment.
Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets.
C. Edgebanding; Apply without seams using hot melt adhesives.
2.05 CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with
requirements indicated.
1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to particleboard except where
hardware is through-bolted from back side.
2. Finishes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide finishes that comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish
number indicated.
a. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
b. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
3. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish complying with product class requirements in
BHMA A156.9.
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing.
Provide two hinges for doors less than 36 inches high and one additional hinge for each additional 24 inches of
height or fraction thereof.
1. Product: Hettich No. 4944 or equivalent (www.hettich.com).
C. Pulls: Solid stainless-steel or chrome-plated brass wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors,
provide recessed stainless-steel or chrome-plated flush-pulls. Provide 2 pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
D. Drawer Slides: Zinc-plated, metal-channel, self-closing drawer slides, designed to prevent rebound when drawers
are closed, with positive in and out stops, nylon-tired ball-bearing rollers, and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type
B05091, and rated for the following loads:
1. Drawer Slides unless otherwise indicated: 100 lbf.
2. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf.
E. Silencers: For doors and drawers, provide 3/8-inch-diameter self-adhesive neoprene disks at contact corners (two
per door, four per drawer).
F. Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, Type B04013, clear plastic, two-pin style with hold-down clip.
2.06 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane free of defects. Provide front
and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets.
B. Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded with waterproof glue to both sides of 3/4-inch
medium-density fiberboard or particleboard. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 3550
Renton Technical College INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 6
September 30, 2022 12 3550 - 5
1. Minimize number of joints. No joints are permitted within 24 inches of sinks, counter ends, or knee space
areas.
2. Provide nominal 1-1/2-inch-thick countertop edges. Provide plastic-laminate edgings of the same material as
top on front edge of top, on top edges of backsplashes and end splashes, and on ends of tops and splashes.
Laminate edges before tops.
3. Integrally attach and seal backsplashes and end splashes to countertops. Provide excess material at
backsplashes and end splashes for field-scribing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of
reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of institutional casework.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. General: Install plumb, level, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Neatly scribe casework to adjoining
surfaces. Provide filler strips as necessary.
B. Fasteners, General: At exposed portions of casework, provide concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
Where not possible and at semi-exposed portions of casework, provide minimum No.10 wafer-head screws or
oval-head screws with stainless steel cup washers.
1. When joining adjacent cabinets provide chrome-plated interlocking (sex)-type bolts.
2. All fasteners shall be corrosion-resistant.
C. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten
cabinets to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Bolt
adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a
tolerance of 1/16 inch.
1. Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor at toe space with fasteners spaced 24
inches o.c. Secure sides of cabinets to floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than two
fasteners.
D. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane.
Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten through back, near top and
bottom, not more than 16 inches-on-horizontal-center and in strict conformance with seismic codes. Align similar
adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises, unless otherwise indicated. Adjust and
align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after
installation.
F. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating
hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 COUNTERTOP INSTALLATION
A. Field Jointing: Factory-prepared in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and
fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with a minimum of four concealed clamping devices. Locate
in- and out-board devices within 6 inches of front and back edges. Tighten according to manufacturer's written
instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.
B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each front, end, and
back.
C. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection.
D. At knee areas or at countertops installed without base cabinets for support, provide support brackets at 32 inches
o.c. maximum.
1. Provide grommets for cable passage at rear of each knee space at 32 inches o.c., min. 2 grommets per knee
space.
E. Neatly scribe backsplashes and end splashes to walls. Filler strips and plastic laminate side seams are prohibited.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 12 3550
Renton Technical College INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 6
September 30, 2022 12 3550 - 6
F. Seal junctures of top, splash, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing
compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. Profile of bead to be concave, consistent for full
length of joint, and free of all tool marks. Minimize width of sealant joints.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.
B. Upon completion of installation, clean finished surfaces. Repair defective, damaged, or soiled work, including
damage to adjoining finishes. Remove and replace materials that cannot be restored to original factory finish by sole
judgment of Architect.
C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic over corrugated cardboard, or other suitable water- and impact-resistant covering,
over full extent of countertop surfaces. Secure in position with non-staining removable adhesive. Replace any
coverings damaged during balance of Work. Remove protection immediately prior to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 21 1313
Renton Technical College WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 21 1313 - 1
SECTION 21 1313 - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the design, provision, and testing of a
complete fire protection system as described herein and as required by the Authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system, system design, installation, and certification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide complete fire protection systems as specified and as required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
Where there is conflict between local authority requirements or other standards, agency recommendations, and
these drawings and specifications, conform with recommendations of standards agencies and requirements of
local authorities. Design and install all systems in accordance NFPA 13 and all applicable codes, standards, and
regulations.
B. Modify the building’s existing wet-pipe fire sprinkler system to serve the remodeled areas of the building as shown
on the plans.
C. Perform the work in phases as noted on the drawings. Provide valves in the sprinkler piping as required to isolate
the portions of sprinkler piping to be modified while the work is performed. The existing wet-pipe sprinkler system
must remain active in all areas other than the area that is being worked on during the specific phase.
D. Provide hydraulically designed system to NFPA 13 ordinary hazard occupancy requirements.
E. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data.
F. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system.
G. Provide fire department connections as indicated on Drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of finished ceiling areas indicating sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling
installation. Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate
system controls.
B. Product Data: Submit data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information.
Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.
C. Design Data: Submit design calculations.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate
drain and test locations.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings,
inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in shipping containers until installation.
B. Furnish piping with temporary inlet and outlet caps until installation.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 21 1313
Renton Technical College WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 21 1313 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 10 black.
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME
B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.4, threaded fittings.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings, ASTM 47.
4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric
sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon-steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring pocked and O-ring
uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM 75; ASTM B88; Type M, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze, solder joint, pressure type.
2. Joints: AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4 silver braze.
2.02 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ansul Incorporated Model.
2. Automatic Sprinkler Corp.
3. Grinnell Corp.
4. Reliable Sprinkler Corp.
5. Tyco
B. Suspended Ceiling Type:
1. Type: Concealed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate.
2. Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
2.03 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS
A. Flexible sprinkler connections by FlexHead Industries, Victaulic Vic-Flex or approved equal or better product.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Isolate and drain building’s sprinkler system prior to beginning work. Coordinate isolation of sprinkler system with
Owner.
C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
D. Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
E. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and install piping offsets.
F. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.
G. Hydrostatically test entire system.
H. Require test be witnessed by Authority having jurisdiction.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 21 1313
Renton Technical College WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 21 1313 - 3
3.03 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons not
receiving field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers with new.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 6
September 30, 2022 22 0000 - 1
SECTION 22 0000 – GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. AIA Document A201 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" with supplements thereto, special
conditions and applicable portions of Division 1 are hereby made a part of this division of the specifications and
shall apply to work under this Division of the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of Division 22 consists of providing labor and products, and of performing all operations required for the
complete operating installation of all mechanical systems as shown and specified, in strict accordance with this
and all sections of these specifications, applicable drawings, terms, and conditions of the contract, and all
applicable codes and ordinances governing installation of the various mechanical systems. Coordinate all work
fully with the work of other crafts. Provide all systems complete and in proper operating order. This section of
Division 22 is a part of all other sections of Division 22.
1.03 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A. Drawings and specifications are complementary, each to the other; what is shown on one is as binding as if called
for in both.
B. The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not show all offsets in ducts or piping or exact location of piping,
ducts, etc. Also, the drawings do not necessarily show in detail all features of the installation. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to provide equipment that fits into the space allotted and allows adequate
acceptance clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing and maintenance.
C. Refer to details, diagrams and schematics, in addition to all Mechanical Specifications, for detailed requirements
for isolating valves, drain valves, vents, instruments, flexible connectors and similar components.
D. If there appears to be insufficient space to install the mechanical work as shown, the A/E shall be notified prior to
proceeding with the work. Failure to comply with this requirement will be considered sufficient cause to require
altering the work, at no additional cost to the contract, as directed by the A/E.
1.04 CODES, PERMITS, STANDARDS, INSPECTIONS AND FEES
A. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the current versions of the National Fire Codes of
the National Fire Protection Association, International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform
Plumbing Code, Washington State Energy Code, Federal, State and Local standards, with the requirements of
local utility companies, and with the requirements of all governmental agencies and departments having
jurisdiction.
B. All materials and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shall bear the approval label, or
shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
C. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government sales taxes, fees and
other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with his work; file all necessary plans,
arrange for all necessary inspections, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all
governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work, and deliver
three copies of same before request for acceptance and final payment for work.
D. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, in
order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations.
E. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed as directing or permitting work which is not fully in
conformance with Codes and Regulations.
F. Where the Drawings or Specifications indicate materials or construction which exceeds the quality or size required
by Codes and Regulations, the provisions of the Drawings or Specifications take precedence over the
requirements of the Codes and Regulations.
G. Any variance from code requirements shall be promptly reported to the A/E. No work shall be installed which is
not in accordance with Codes and Regulations.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 6
September 30, 2022 22 0000 - 2
1.05 REVIEW OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Procedures and requirements for submittals are addressed in Division 1. In addition, comply with
specific requirements of the individual sections and as noted herein.
B. Submittals: Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 22 and shown on the Drawings
to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment submittals in the manner
described elsewhere in these Specifications. In addition, include data for review, organized as noted below. No
work shall begin, or products ordered until submittals are approved.
C. Data Required for Review: Mark submittal literature clearly, bind 8-1/2 x 11 literature in three-hole, hard-backed,
loose-leaf binders by individual sets, and include all equipment and material shown on drawings and specified.
Submittals not organized and prepared as follows will be returned to the Contractor for compliance prior to any
detailed review. Indicate the following:
1. Table of Contents listed by specification index sections.
2. Individual tabs numbered by specification section.
3. Specification reference and/or drawing reference for which literature is submitted.
4. Manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address and telephone number.
5. Catalog designation or model number.
6. Rough-in data and dimensions.
7. Performance curves and rated capacities.
8. Operation characteristics.
9. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested
shall be specific, and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall be clearly made. Data
of a general nature will not be accepted. When equipment submitted is of a different size or weight, or has
different access, service or installation clearances, than the designed equipment, the equipment submittals
shall clearly note the differences.
10. Working construction drawings (shop drawings).
D. Partial Submittals: If other than a complete submittal is made, the Contractor may make partial submittals
separated into complete specification section classifications. Piece-meal submittals will be returned without
review, except for special situations.
E. Submittal review is for general design and arrangement only and does not relieve the Contractor from any of the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be checked for quantity, dimension, fit, or proper
technical design of manufactured equipment. Where deviations of substitute product or system performance have
not been specifically noted in the submittal by the Contractor, provision of a complete and satisfactory working
installation is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
F. Equipment Deviations:
1. Items of equipment or material designated in the plans or specifications by use of a specific manufacture and
number are so noted to indicate a standard of design and not necessarily to be restrictive. Substituted
equipment or materials shall be equivalent in capacities, acoustical performance and electrical requirements
to the equipment used as the basis for the design. Note that a manufacturer’s product may be listed as an
approved substitute but may still have different electrical requirements from the product listed as the basis for
the design.
2. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the
drawing which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part
of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, all new drawings and detailing required
therefore, and all additional construction costs, shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own expense and
approved by the A/E.
3. Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring,
conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and
install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring
and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 6
September 30, 2022 22 0000 - 3
Contract. The submittals shall clearly indicate any difference in requirements of other trades from the
product listed as the basis for the design.
4. If the dimensions or access requirements for equipment submitted differ from equipment dimensions or
access requirements indicated on the drawings the submittals shall be clearly marked to indicate the
differences. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting equipment which fits the available space as
well as being equivalent to the specified equipment.
5. All materials shall be furnished and installed in conformance with Codes and Regulations.
6. All equipment of the same type, such as valves, fittings, fixtures, fans, control components, etc., shall be
products of the same manufacturer, used as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.06 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The schedule of Values for Mechanical work shall be prepared in accordance with Division 1 requirements. The
breakdown of Mechanical work shall include the following categories:
1. Mobilization and Demobilization
2. Water Piping
3. Waste and Vent Piping, underground
4. Waste and Vent Piping, above ground
5. Plumbing Fixture rough-in.
6. Plumbing Fixtures
7. Plumbing Piping Insulation
1.07 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
A/E Architect/Engineer
AGA American Gas Association
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
F degrees, Fahrenheit
FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic
FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NEC National Electrical Code
NFPA National Fire Protection
psig pounds per square inch gage pressure
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 6
September 30, 2022 22 0000 - 4
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
v Volts
wp Working Pressure (psig)
wg Water gage
1.08 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY
A. Streamlining: In many instances, the products, reference standards, and other itemized specifications have been
listed without verbiage. In these cases, it is implied that the Contractor shall provide the products and perform in
accordance with the references listed.
B. "Provide", as used in this division of the specifications, means furnish all material, labor, sub-contracts, and
appurtenances required, including mark-up, and install to a complete, operating, finished condition.
C. "Install", as used in this division of the specifications, means to set in place and connect, ready for use and in
complete, operating, finished condition, material that has been furnished by other than the Mechanical Contractor.
D. "Rough-in and Connect Only" means provide an appropriate system connection such as supplies with stops,
continuous wastes with traps, shut-off valves required, and all piping connections, testing, etc., for proper
operation, and to connect equipment furnished by other than the Mechanical Contractor. Equipment furnished is
received, uncrated, assembled and set in place by supporting crafts unless they make prior arrangements to hire
the mechanical installer for this work.
E. "Accessible" means arranged so that an average size man may complete any service required without
disassembly or damage to the surrounding installation.
F. "Serviceable" means arranged so that the component or product in question may be properly serviced without
disassembly, destruction, or damage to the surrounding installation or item being serviced.
G. "Product" is a generic term which includes materials, equipment, fixtures and any physical item used on the
project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. This Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish in writing to other contractors, with
copies to the A/E, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily, with the
least possible interference or delay, and with maximum headroom and clearance.
B. The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and
shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his work or workmen and shall be liable for all
damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; he shall
protect work against theft, injury or damage; and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site
which are not immediately installed. He shall close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during
storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
3.03 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING
A. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into
the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.
3.04 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished,
delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly
into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article as
approved by the A/E shall be furnished.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 6
September 30, 2022 22 0000 - 5
B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of
the installation of the work, together with all skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and labor
required to unload, transfer, erect, connect-up, adjust, start, operate, and test each system.
C. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications, all equipment and materials shall be
installed with the approval of the A/E in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes
the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.
D. As required by requirements of the Mechanical Specifications, other portions of the Specifications, and Standards
to which reference is made in the Specifications, or where prohibited by Codes, Regulations and Ordinances, no
materials shall be installed which exceed the allowable limits of flame-spread or smoke-developed indexes, or
which do not meet the requirements for Approved Plastic Materials as defined in the Uniform Building Code. (No
exposed PVC materials shall be installed in the building.)
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting and Patching: Keep cutting and patching to a minimum. If required, all patching shall conform to
specifications for the new General Construction work. Finish to match existing work. Conform to Division 1.
B. Measurements: Verify space availability by field measurement prior to submitting shop drawings for approval.
C. Roughing-In Dimensions: Obtain roughing-in dimensions for equipment from approved shop drawings or actual
equipment measurements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions where furnished. If the details
are in conflict with design drawings, notify the A/E prior to proceeding with the installation.
E. Accessibility: Install all equipment which requires periodic servicing or repairs, so it is readily accessible.
Otherwise, obtain the A/E's approval of location.
F. Provision for Light Fixtures: In installing piping and ductwork, allow clearance for light fixtures. If interferences
occur, move the piping or ducts and, if not possible, notify the A/E.
G. Delivery, Storage, and Handling.
1. Handle, store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the A/E. Replace damaged or
defective items.
2. Factory finished equipment which is damaged shall be refinished as required to bring the equipment to a like-
new condition in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If, in the opinion of the A/E, the
equipment cannot be satisfactorily repaired, the equipment shall be replaced.
3.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Furnish one set of as-built drawings to the A/E in conformance with the requirements of Division 1.
B. As-built drawings shall show all buried piping and duct work, with dimensions given to permanent, easily identified
building features.
C. As-built drawings shall indicate locations of all valves, dampers, and other access points which are above ceilings
or concealed in walls. Valve numbers shall be indicated on the As-Built Drawings.
3.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. Prepare three copies of an Operating and Maintenance Manual for all equipment provided under Division 22 in
accordance with Division 1.
B. Contents:
1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall include operating information, maintenance information, control
information, parts lists, filter information when applicable, lubrication information and exploded view diagrams
when applicable.
2. Information shall be arranged in an orderly manner, generally in the sequence of the specifications.
3. An index shall list the contents of each section of the manual, with index tabs matching the index. The index
page shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the mechanical contractor. The index page of
each section shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the contractor or subcontractor
responsible for the products included in that section of the manual.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 6
September 30, 2022 22 0000 - 6
4. The index page shall list the name, address, and telephone number of a 24-hour, seven-day emergency
organization; either the contractor or a service organization authorized to represent the contractor.
5. The temperature control section shall include information for control components, control diagrams,
sequences of operation, and As-Built drawings of the controls. When applicable, the control section shall
include point-to-point test lists and other testing, adjusting and calibration documentation.
6. The manuals shall include Testing and Balancing Reports.
C. Manuals shall be provided in high quality, three-ring binders. The outside of the binders shall be printed or
stamped with the name of the project, the names of the Owner, Consulting Engineer, and Contractor, and the year
the project was completed. The identification shall be permanently attached, contrasting color to the binder and
sized appropriately. Plastic tape labels will not be considered permanent labels.
D. Submit one preliminary copy of the manual for review by the A/E prior to assembling the final copies. This
preliminary copy will be returned, and with any required additions and corrections, can be used as one of the final
copies of the manual.
E. Submit the final manuals before requesting final payment.
3.08 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. Submit written copies of all guarantees and warranties prior to requesting final payment.
3.09 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. When requesting final inspection, give ten days' notice. Submit written certification that the work has been fully
completed in strict accordance with plans and specifications.
3.10 INSPECTION
A. Submit written certification of inspection from the governing building authority stating that all work has been
inspected, accepted and approved as complying with existing governing ordinances and codes.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0553
Renton Technical College IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 22 0553 – 1
SECTION 22 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe markers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and
valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and
model number.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping systems and accessories.
B. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brimar
2. Brady Model B-946
B. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.
C. Plastic Pipe Markers:
1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may
have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Brady Model B-946
2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
E. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:
1. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured
for direct burial service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0553
Renton Technical College IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 22 0553 – 2
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
B. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas
covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
C. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
D. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs
including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,
and at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0700
Renton Technical College PLUMBING INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 22 0700 – 1
SECTION 22 0700 – PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Piping system insulation.
2. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for plumbing
piping and equipment identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip.
2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
3. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
4. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
5. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
6. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
7. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
8. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet
and Tubular Form.
9. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
10. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
11. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation.
12. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation
(Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).
13. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
14. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
15. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel.
16. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
17. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation.
18. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
19. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally
Insulate HVAC Ducts.
20. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
21. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
22. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0700
Renton Technical College PLUMBING INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 22 0700 – 2
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each
service, and location.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation
procedures.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product
density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original
wrapping.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS FIBER - PIPE INSULATION
A. Manufacturers:
1. Knauf.
2. Owens Corning SSL II
3. Johns Manville Micro-Lok
B. Insulation: ASTM C612, C547; rigid, noncombustible.
1. ‘K’ factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: Less than 5% by weight.
4. Min. Density: 3.5 lb/cu ft.
C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM C1136 Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation, Type II.
D. Facing: 1 inch galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation.
E. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Foster Model 85-20.
b. Childers Vi-Cryl
2. Compatible with insulation.
F. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Model 460.
2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
G. Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Insulation: ASTM C610, Pipe Insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0700
Renton Technical College PLUMBING INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 22 0700 – 3
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves,
unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
B. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure
sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward
clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
C. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
D. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or
pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with
glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
E. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping or Equipment 1-1/2 inches, diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be
factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and
service.
F. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance
rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish
at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire
resistance rating greater than one hour.
G. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment
with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
H. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment,
use vapor retarder cement.
I. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.
J. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor retarder jackets,
factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass-cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
K. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and
jackets.
L. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or
without vapor retarder, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
M. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
N. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
O. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
P. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and
replacement without damage.
3.03 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.
1. Insulation Material: Glass-fiber, preformed.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 0700
Renton Technical College PLUMBING INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 22 0700 – 4
2. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, 1/2-inch – 1-1/4-inch: 1-inch.
b. Pipe, 1-1/2-inch and above: 1-1/2-inch.
3. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
4. Insulation Conductivity Range: 0.24 – 0.28 BTUin/(hrft2F).
B. Service: Domestic cold water.
1. Insulation Material: Glass-fiber, preformed.
2. Insulation Thickness: 1/2-inch.
a. Pipe, 1/2-inch – 1-1/4-inch: 1/2-inch.
b. Pipe, 1-1/2-inch and above: 1-inch.
3. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
4. Insulation Conductivity Range: 0.23 – 0.27 BTUin/(hrft2F).
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1100
Renton Technical College FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1100 – 1
SECTION 22 1100 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Domestic water piping.
2. Unions and flanges.
3. Valves.
4. Pipe hangers and supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe
identification and valve tags for placement by this section.
2. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z21.22 - Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
3. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
4. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
5. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.
6. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
7. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering:
1. ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters.
2. ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
3. ASSE 1012 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent.
4. ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced
Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers.
5. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic
Draining Type.
D. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service.
3. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at
Elevated Temperatures.
4. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
5. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
6. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes.
7. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
8. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1100
Renton Technical College FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1100 – 2
E. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves.
3. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
4. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
5. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
6. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
7. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
8. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded.
9. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
10. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.
G. Plumbing and Drainage Institute:
1. PDI WH201 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard.
H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service.
2. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturer's catalog information.
2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service.
3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity.
4. Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in
requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
5. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with
pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves and accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and recommended
maintenance intervals.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and
isolating parts of completed system.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1100
Renton Technical College FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1100 – 3
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for domestic water piping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Weiland
b. Meuller
2. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
3. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535
degrees F.
2.02 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Nibco
B. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered joints.
2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier. Watts LF3001A.
C. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger:
1. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges. Elkhart 741
2.03 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Milwaukee
2. Apollo
3. Nibco
B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 600 CWP, two piece lead free brass body, chrome plated brass ball, full port,
RPTFE seats and packing, lead free brass stem, solder or threaded ends, plated steel handle wit polyvinyl
insulation.
2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line
2. Anvil
B. Plumbing Piping: Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, MSS SP 89.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
D. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
E. Hangers for Hot Pipe, Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
F. Hangers for Hot Pipe, Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll and double hanger.
G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods.
H. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded supports or
spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1100
Renton Technical College FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1100 – 4
J. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamps.
K. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with
adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.
L. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
M. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.
N. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
O. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plate.
PART 3– EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
3.03 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete
beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed
square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
B. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, and MSS SP 89.
2. Support horizontal piping as schedule.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without
disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
7. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts,
and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
C. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1100
Renton Technical College FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1100 – 5
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to
valves and fittings.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible.
I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat
of zinc rich primer to welding.
J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
K. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
L. Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.
M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
N. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping.
O. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Q. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.
R. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
S. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
T. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when functioning to isolate equipment.
U. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
V. Provide flow controls in water circulating systems.
W. Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on
boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves,
interior and exterior hose bibs.
X. Pipe relief from valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.
Y. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to
plumbing fixtures equipped with flush valves and washing machine outlets.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with local authority having jurisdiction.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM
HANGER SPACING
Feet
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
Copper Tube, 1-1/4 inches and smaller 6 1/2
Copper Tube, 1-1/2 inches and larger 10 1/2
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1300
Renton Technical College FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1300 – 1
SECTION 22 1300 – FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet of building.
2. Sanitary sewer piping above grade.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Cleanouts.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe
identification for placement by this section.
2. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
2. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
3. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
4. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV).
5. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
6. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
3. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
4. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service.
C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute:
1. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
2. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
4. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.
E. Plumbing and Drainage Institute:
1. PDI G101 - Standard - Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1300
Renton Technical College FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1300 – 2
2. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity.
3. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in
requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Include, spare parts
lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and
isolating parts of completed system.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hub-less.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hub-less, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Tolco.
2. Anvil.
B. Drain, Waste, and Vent: Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, MSS SP 89.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
D. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.
G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
I. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
J. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon-steel, copper-plated adjustable ring.
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Josam
2. Watts
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1300
Renton Technical College FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1300 – 3
B. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
C. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Epoxy coated cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded
nickel bronze top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round depressed cover with
gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. Watts CO-200-R.
D. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover with gasket,
and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.
3.03 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete
beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed
square steel plate and nut above slab.
B. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, and MSS SP 89.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without
disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
7. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze
hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts,
and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
10. Install hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation.
3.04 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.
B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 2 ft of cover.
C. Establish minimum separation of 2 ft from other services piping in accordance with code.
D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.
E. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1300
Renton Technical College FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1300 – 4
F. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one
continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density.
G. Install pipe on prepared bedding.
H. Route pipe in straight line.
I. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe.
J. Pipe Cover and Backfilling:
1. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density.
2. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in
6 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum
density.
3. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material.
4. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping.
3.05 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and
linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
F. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
G. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space.
H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation.
K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible.
L. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat
of zinc rich primer to welding.
N. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
O. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
P. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping.
Q. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with local authority having jurisdiction.
3.07 SCHEDULES
PIPE HANGER SPACING
PIPE MATERIAL
MAXIMUM
HANGER SPACING
Feet
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
Cast Iron (All Sizes) 5 5/8
Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10
foot length of pipe
10 5/8
Note for Cast Iron Pipe: Provide close to joint on barrel. Also provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch
connection.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 1300
Renton Technical College FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 5
September 30, 2022 22 1300 – 5
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 4000
Renton Technical College PLUMBING FIXTURES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 22 4000 – 1
SECTION 22 4000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sinks.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to plumbing fixtures.
2. Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Waste connections to plumbing fixtures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ANSI Z124.2 - Plastic Shower Units.
3. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.
B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A112.6.1 - Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
2. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
3. ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
4. ASME A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
5. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use).
6. ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
7. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fixture, trim, exploded view and replacement parts lists.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as
suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect
fixtures and prevent use.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SINKS
A. Manufacturers:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 22 4000
Renton Technical College PLUMBING FIXTURES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 22 4000 – 2
1. Elkay
2. Just
B. Elkay LR2522SC stainless steel 25" x 22" x 8-1/8", 3-hole single bowl drop-in sink and faucet kit. Sink shall be
manufactured from 18 gauge 304 stainless steel with satin finish, center drain placement, and sides and bottom
pads.
C. Elkay LK810GN04T4SC faucet,
D. Elkay LK18B drain
E. Elkay LK500 P-trap and tailpiece.
F. Chrome plated brass quarter-turn stop valves.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of countertop lavatories and sinks.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for
particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and
installation.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 6
September 30, 2022 23 0000 – 1
SECTION 23 0000 – GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. AIA Document A201 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" with supplements thereto, special
conditions and applicable portions of Division 1 are hereby made a part of this division of the specifications and
shall apply to work under this Division of the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of Divisions 23 consist of providing labor and products, and of performing all operations required for the
complete operating installation of all mechanical systems as shown and specified, in strict accordance with this
and all sections of these specifications, applicable drawings, terms, and conditions of the contract, and all
applicable codes and ordinances governing installation of the various mechanical systems. Coordinate all work
fully with the work of other crafts. Provide all systems complete and in proper operating order.
1.03 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A. Drawings and specifications are complementary, each to the other; what is shown on one is as binding as if called
for in both.
B. The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not show all offsets in ducts or piping or exact location of piping,
ducts, etc. Also, the drawings do not necessarily show in detail all features of the installation. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to provide equipment that fits into the space allotted and allows adequate
acceptance clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing and maintenance.
C. Refer to details, diagrams and schematics, in addition to all Mechanical Specifications, for detailed requirements
for isolating valves, drain valves, vents, instruments, flexible connectors and similar components.
D. If there appears to be insufficient space to install the mechanical work as shown, the A/E shall be notified prior to
proceeding with the work. Failure to comply with this requirement will be considered sufficient cause to require
altering the work, at no additional cost to the contract, as directed by the A/E.
1.04 CODES, PERMITS, STANDARDS, INSPECTIONS AND FEES
A. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the current versions of the National Fire Codes of
the National Fire Protection Association, International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform
Plumbing Code, Washington State Energy Code, Federal, State and Local standards, with the requirements of
local utility companies, and with the requirements of all governmental agencies and departments having
jurisdiction.
B. All materials and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shall bear the approval label, or
shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
C. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government sales taxes, fees and
other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with his work; file all necessary plans,
arrange for all necessary inspections, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all
governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work, and deliver
three copies of same before request for acceptance and final payment for work.
D. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, in
order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations.
E. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed as directing or permitting work which is not fully in
conformance with Codes and Regulations.
F. Where the Drawings or Specifications indicate materials or construction which exceeds the quality or size required
by Codes and Regulations, the provisions of the Drawings or Specifications take precedence over the
requirements of the Codes and Regulations.
G. Any variance from code requirements shall be promptly reported to the A/E. No work shall be installed which is
not in accordance with Codes and Regulations.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 6
September 30, 2022 23 0000 – 2
1.05 REVIEW OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Procedures and requirements for submittals are addressed in Division 1. In addition, comply with
specific requirements of the individual sections and as noted herein.
B. Submittals: Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Divisions 21, 22 and 23 and shown on
the Drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment submittals in
the manner described elsewhere in these Specifications. In addition, include data for review, organized as noted
below. No work shall begin or products ordered until submittals are approved.
C. Data Required for Review: Mark submittal literature clearly, bind 8-1/2 x 11 literature in three-hole, hard-backed,
loose-leaf binders by individual sets, and include all equipment and material shown on drawings and specified.
Submittals not organized and prepared as follows will be returned to the Contractor for compliance prior to any
detailed review. Indicate the following:
1. Table of Contents listed by specification index sections.
2. Individual tabs numbered by specification section.
3. Specification reference and/or drawing reference for which literature is submitted.
4. Manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address and telephone number.
5. Catalog designation or model number.
6. Rough-in data and dimensions.
7. Performance curves and rated capacities.
8. Operation characteristics.
9. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested
shall be specific, and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall be clearly made. Data
of a general nature will not be accepted. When equipment submitted is of a different size or weight, or has
different access, service or installation clearances, than the designed equipment, the equipment submittals
shall clearly note the differences.
10. Working construction drawings (shop drawings).
D. Partial Submittals: If other than a complete submittal is made, the Contractor may make partial submittals
separated into complete specification section classifications. Piece-meal submittals will be returned without
review, except for special situations.
E. Submittal review is for general design and arrangement only, and does not relieve the Contractor from any of the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be checked for quantity, dimension, fit, or proper
technical design of manufactured equipment. Where deviations of substitute product or system performance have
not been specifically noted in the submittal by the Contractor, provision of a complete and satisfactory working
installation is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
F. Equipment Deviations:
1. Items of equipment or material designated in the plans or specifications by use of a specific manufacture and
number are so noted to indicate a standard of design and not necessarily to be restrictive. Substituted
equipment or materials shall be equivalent in capacities, weight, acoustical performance and electrical
requirements to the equipment used as the basis for the design. Note that a manufacturer’s product may be
listed as an approved substitute but may still have different electrical requirements from the product listed as
the basis for the design.
2. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the
drawing which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part
of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, all new drawings and detailing required
therefore, and all additional construction costs, shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own expense and
approved by the A/E.
3. Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring,
conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and
install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring
and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 6
September 30, 2022 23 0000 – 3
Contract. The submittals shall clearly indicate any difference in requirements of other trades from the
product listed as the basis for the design.
4. If the dimensions or access requirements for equipment submitted differ from equipment dimensions or
access requirements indicated on the drawings the submittals shall be clearly marked to indicate the
differences. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting equipment which fits the available space as
well as being equivalent to the specified equipment.
5. All materials shall be furnished and installed in conformance with Codes and Regulations.
6. All equipment of the same type, such as valves, fittings, fixtures, fans, control components, etc., shall be
products of the same manufacturer, used as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.06 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The schedule of Values for Mechanical work shall be prepared in accordance with Division 1 requirements. The
breakdown of Mechanical work shall include the following categories:
1. Mobilization and Demobilization
2. Ductwork and Accessories – Labor
3. Ductwork and Accessories – Material
4. Grilles, registers and diffusers.
5. TAB
6. Temperature controls.
7. Close-out.
1.07 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
A/E Architect/Engineer
AGA American Gas Association
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
F degrees, Fahrenheit
FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic
FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NEC National Electrical Code
NFPA National Fire Protection
psig pounds per square inch gage pressure
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 6
September 30, 2022 23 0000 – 4
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
v Volts
wp Working Pressure (psig)
wg Water gage
1.08 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY
A. Streamlining: In many instances, the products, reference standards, and other itemized specifications have been
listed without verbiage. In these cases, it is implied that the Contractor shall provide the products and perform in
accordance with the references listed.
B. "Provide", as used in this division of the specifications, means furnish all material, labor, sub-contracts, and
appurtenances required, including mark-up, and install to a complete, operating, finished condition.
C. "Install", as used in this division of the specifications, means to set in place and connect, ready for use and in
complete, operating, finished condition, material that has been furnished by other than the Mechanical Contractor.
D. "Rough-in and Connect Only" means provide an appropriate system connection such as supplies with stops,
continuous wastes with traps, shut-off valves required, and all piping connections, testing, etc., for proper
operation, and to connect equipment furnished by other than the Mechanical Contractor. Equipment furnished is
received, uncrated, assembled and set in place by supporting crafts unless they make prior arrangements to hire
the mechanical installer for this work.
E. "Accessible" means arranged so that an average size man may complete any service required without
disassembly or damage to the surrounding installation.
F. "Serviceable" means arranged so that the component or product in question may be properly serviced without
disassembly, destruction, or damage to the surrounding installation or item being serviced.
G. "Product" is a generic term which includes materials, equipment, fixtures and any physical item used on the
project.
1.09 DEMOLITION
A. Demolition of existing mechanical work is noted on the Drawings. the exact extent of demolition required must be
verified by on-site review. The scope of demolition required is as follows:
B. Disconnect and demolished the existing HVAC ductwork, grilles and diffusers and supports as shown on the
drawings.
C. Remove and replace or reinstall all equipment, piping, ductwork and accessories which must be moved or
disassembled in order to accomplish the work shown.
D. Install new piping connections, fittings, insulation, and hangers, as necessary on any piping which is to remain in
service, to provide a complete and functional system.
E. Where there is any question as to whether materials are to be removed or are to remain, the Architect or Engineer
shall be consulted.
F. Where mechanical materials are removed and the surrounding surfaces are to remain, the surfaces shall be
repaired, rebuilt and patched, with the quality of work and materials to be in conformance with the requirements of
other sections of the Specifications. Fire rated construction shall be patched to maintain the fire rating.
G. The Owner has the right to retain ownership of any materials being removed. Other materials shall be the
property of the Contractor, and shall be promptly removed from the site.
H. Maximum precautions shall be taken to provide protection for the existing building and equipment from damage.
Prevent water and dust from entering the existing building.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 6
September 30, 2022 23 0000 – 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. This Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish in writing to other contractors, with
copies to the A/E, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily, with the
least possible interference or delay, and with maximum headroom and clearance.
B. The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and
shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by their work or workpeople, and shall be liable for
all damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; he shall
protect work against theft, injury or damage; and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site
which are not immediately installed. He shall close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during
storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
3.03 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING
A. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into
the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required.
3.04 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished,
delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly
into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article as
approved by the A/E shall be furnished.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of
the installation of the work, together with all skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and labor
required to unload, transfer, erect, connect-up, adjust, start, operate, and test each system.
C. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications, all equipment and materials shall be
installed with the approval of the A/E in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes
the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.
D. As required by requirements of the Mechanical Specifications, other portions of the Specifications, and Standards
to which reference is made in the Specifications, or where prohibited by Codes, Regulations and Ordinances, no
materials shall be installed which exceed the allowable limits of flame-spread or smoke-developed indexes, or
which do not meet the requirements for Approved Plastic Materials as defined in the Uniform Building Code. (No
exposed PVC materials shall be installed in the building.)
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting and Patching: Keep cutting and patching to a minimum. If required, all patching shall conform to
specifications for the new General Construction work. Finish to match existing work. Conform to Division 1.
B. Measurements: Verify space availability by field measurement prior to submitting shop drawings for approval.
C. Roughing-In Dimensions: Obtain roughing-in dimensions for equipment from approved shop drawings or actual
equipment measurements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions where furnished. If the details
are in conflict with design drawings, notify the A/E prior to proceeding with the installation.
E. Accessibility: Install all equipment which requires periodic servicing or repairs so it is readily accessible.
Otherwise, obtain the A/E's approval of location.
F. Provision for Light Fixtures: In installing piping and ductwork, allow clearance for light fixtures. If interferences
occur, move the piping or ducts and, if not possible, notify the A/E.
G. Delivery, Storage, and Handling.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0000
Renton Technical College GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 6
September 30, 2022 23 0000 – 6
1. Handle, store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the A/E. Replace damaged or
defective items.
2. Factory finished equipment which is damaged shall be refinished as required to bring the equipment to a like-
new condition in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If, in the opinion of the A/E, the
equipment cannot be satisfactorily repaired, the equipment shall be replaced.
3.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Furnish one set of as-built drawings to the A/E in conformance with the requirements of Division 1.
B. As-built drawings shall show all buried piping and duct work, with dimensions given to permanent, easily identified
building features.
C. As-built drawings shall indicate locations of all valves, dampers, and other access points which are above ceilings
or concealed in walls. Valve numbers shall be indicated on the As-Built Drawings.
3.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. Prepare three copies of an Operating and Maintenance Manual for all equipment provided under Division 23 in
accordance with Division 01.
B. Contents:
1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall include operating information, maintenance information, control
information, parts lists, filter information when applicable, lubrication information and exploded view diagrams
when applicable.
2. Information shall be arranged in an orderly manner, generally in the sequence of the specifications.
3. An index shall list the contents of each section of the manual, with index tabs matching the index. The index
page shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the mechanical contractor. The index page of
each section shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the contractor or subcontractor
responsible for the products included in that section of the manual.
4. The index page shall list the name, address, and telephone number of a 24-hour, seven-day emergency
organization; either the contractor or a service organization authorized to represent the contractor.
5. The temperature control section shall include information for control components, control diagrams,
sequences of operation, and As-Built drawings of the controls. When applicable, the control section shall
include point-to-point test lists and other testing, adjusting and calibration documentation.
6. The manuals shall include Testing and Balancing Reports.
C. Manuals shall be provided in high quality, three-ring binders. The outside of the binders shall be printed or
stamped with the name of the project, the names of the Owner, Consulting Engineer, and Contractor, and the year
the project was completed. The identification shall be permanently attached, contrasting color to the binder and
sized appropriately. Plastic tape labels will not be considered permanent labels.
D. Submit one preliminary copy of the manual for review by the A/E prior to assembling the final copies. This
preliminary copy will be returned, and with any required additions and corrections, can be used as one of the final
copies of the manual.
E. Submit the final manuals before requesting final payment.
3.08 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. Submit written copies of all guarantees and warranties prior to requesting final payment.
3.09 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. When requesting final inspection, give ten days' notice. Submit written certification that the work has been fully
completed in strict accordance with plans and specifications.
3.10 INSPECTION
A. Submit written certification of inspection from the governing building authority stating that all work has been
inspected, accepted and approved as complying with existing governing ordinances and codes.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0593
Renton Technical College TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 5
September 30, 2022 23 0593 – 1
SECTION 23 0593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation for HVAC
equipment.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Associated Air Balance Council:
1. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation,
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.
B. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms
C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment
to achieve specified performance.
D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
E. Furnish reports in PDF format, manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover
identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to
correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in
operating and maintenance manuals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with [AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation,
Total System Balance.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC
1.07 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0593
Renton Technical College TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 5
September 30, 2022 23 0593 – 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following:
1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
9. Air outlets are installed and connected.
10. Duct system leakage is minimized.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.
B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 10 percent of design to space. Adjust
outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set
and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting
adjustments have been made.
D. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance.
E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical
switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and
witnessed by Owner.
G. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.
3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities
at site altitude.
B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air
motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed.
Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0593
Renton Technical College TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 5
September 30, 2022 23 0593 – 3
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total
pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume
systems at maximum airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum airflow rate, full heating.
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to obtain required relationship
between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near building entries.
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to airflow setting indicated. Confirm
connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable-air-volume temperature control.
N. On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust airflow switches for proper operation.
3.06 SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
1. Water Source Heat Pumps (air side)
2. Exhaust Fans.
3. Air Inlets and Outlets.
B. Report Forms
1. Title Page:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Architect
g. Project Engineer
h. Project Contractor
i. Project altitude
j. Report date
2. Summary Comments:
a. Design versus final performance
b. Notable characteristics of system
c. Description of systems operation sequence
d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization
e. Nomenclature used throughout report
f. Test conditions
3. Instrument List:
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
4. Electric Motors:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0593
Renton Technical College TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 5
September 30, 2022 23 0593 – 4
a. Manufacturer
b. Model/Frame
c. HP/BHP and kW
d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e. RPM
f. Service factor
g. Starter size, rating, heater elements
h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
5. Air Moving Equipment:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge
f. Air flow, specified and actual
g. Return air flow, specified and actual
h. Outside air flow, specified and actual
i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
j. Inlet pressure
k. Discharge pressure
l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
m. Number of Belts/Make/Size
n. Fan RPM
6. Exhaust Fan Data:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Air flow, specified and actual
f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
g. Inlet pressure
h. Discharge pressure
i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
j. Number of Belts/Make/Size
k. Fan RPM
7. Duct Traverse:
a. System zone/branch
b. Duct size
c. Area
d. Design velocity
e. Design air flow
f. Test velocity
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0593
Renton Technical College TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 5
September 30, 2022 23 0593 – 5
g. Test air flow
h. Duct static pressure
i. Air temperature
j. Air correction factor
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0700
Renton Technical College HVAC INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 0700 – 1
SECTION 23 0700 – HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ductwork insulation.
2. Duct liner.
3. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for HVAC piping and
equipment identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip.
2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
3. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
4. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
5. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
6. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
7. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
8. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet
and Tubular Form.
9. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
10. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
11. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
12. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation.
13. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation
(Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).
14. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
15. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
16. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel.
17. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
18. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining
Material).
19. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation.
20. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
21. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally
Insulate HVAC Ducts.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0700
Renton Technical College HVAC INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 0700 – 2
22. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
23. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
24. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
25. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy
Source.
26. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each
service, and location.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product
density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original
wrapping.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MAN MADE MINERAL FIBER, FLEXIBLE BLANKET OR BATTS
A. Insulation: ASTM C1290; Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
1. Operating Temperatures: 250 degrees F.
2. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft.
3. ‘K’ factor: ASTM C518, 0.30 at 75 degrees F.
B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM 1136, Type II Flexible and Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
1. For systems operating at temperatures below ambient, close and secure seams and joints. When outward
clinching staples are used, seal penetrations.
C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
2.02 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER
A. Insulation: ASTM C1071 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material), Type II.
B. Adhesive:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0700
Renton Technical College HVAC INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 0700 – 3
1. Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.
C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied with integral head.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves,
unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
C. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure
sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward
clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
D. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
E. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or
pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with
glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping or Equipment 2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be
factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and
service.
G. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance
rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish
at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire
resistance rating greater than one hour.
H. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces less than 10 feet above finished floor: Finish
with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
I. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like
material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with
aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down
to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal equipment.
J. Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product may be installed in
trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-
sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between
three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with polyester film.
K. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as
adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with
seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0700
Renton Technical College HVAC INSULATION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 0700 – 4
L. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
M. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
N. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment
with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
O. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment,
use vapor retarder cement.
P. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.
Q. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor retarder jackets,
factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass-cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
R. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and
jackets.
S. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or
without vapor retarder, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
T. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
U. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
V. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
W. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and
replacement without damage.
X. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion
joints.
Y. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
Z. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder adhesive or tape to
match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to
prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing
wrapping.
AA. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for
insulation thickness.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0900
Renton Technical College INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 23 0900 – 1
SECTION 23 0900 – INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermostats.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation implemented using
products specified in this section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall Mounted Room Thermostats.
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as
requested.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and
sensors.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials,
and calibration tolerances.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Control Air Damper Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept controls on site in original factory packaging Inspect for damage.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.08 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Reliable Controls by Building Intellect LLC
1. Contact Randy Polajzar 425-233-2394.
2. No substitutes.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for each control system component.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 THERMOSTATS
A. Existing wall mounted thermostats are to be re-used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify building systems to be controlled are ready to operate.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0900
Renton Technical College INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 23 0900 – 2
B. Verify air handling units and ductwork have been accepted and air filters are in place before installing sensors in
air streams.
C. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings before installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves through concrete surfaces in minimum one inch sleeves, extended 6 inches above floors and one
inch below bottom surface of slabs.
B. Relocate thermostats as shown on drawings. Install new control wiring from existing controllers to relocated
thermostats. Conceal all control wiring in walls or in plenums above ceilings.
C. Install thermostats 42 inches above floor. Align with light switches.
D. Install conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 03.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing set points and final
adjustments of controls.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including sequence of operation prior to Date of Substantial
Completion.
B. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 0993
Renton Technical College SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC COTNROLS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 1
September 30, 2022 23 0993 – 1
SECTION 23 0993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sequence of operation for:
1. Exhaust fans.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: For equipment, devices, and system components
to implement sequences of operation.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control system components.
1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Submit written description of control sequence.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and set points of controls, including changes
to sequences made after submission of shop drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXHAUST FANS
A. Exhaust fan shall be controlled by wall switch. The fan shall run continuously when the switch is on and remain off
when the switch is turned off.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3100
Renton Technical College DUCTS & CASINGS FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3100 – 1
SECTION 23 3100 – DUCTS & CASINGS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Duct Materials.
2. Insulated flexible ducts.
3. Single wall spiral round ducts.
4. Transverse duct connection system.
5. Ductwork fabrication.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct accessories for placement by this
section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or
Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
3. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip.
4. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-
Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.
5. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
6. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
7. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
8. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
9. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
2. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
3. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
2. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted
except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE
table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3100
Renton Technical College DUCTS & CASINGS FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3100 – 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit duct fabrication drawings, drawn to scale not smaller than 1/8 inch equals 1 foot, on
drawing sheets same size as Contract Documents, indicating:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components,
and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust duct systems, indicate
classification of materials handled as defined in this section.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcing details and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction details.
6. Penetrations through fire rated and other walls.
7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
B. Product Data: Submit data for duct materials, duct liner and duct connectors.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location
and type. Show additional fittings used.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible.
B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for ducts.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating
of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M.
B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A1008/A1008M, ASTM A1011/A1011M and ASTM A568/A568M.
C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy
6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 316.
E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
2.02 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. JPL MHP
2. Hart & Cooley
B. Product Description: Flexible duct shall be constructed with a spring steel wire helix, encapsulated in a 2-ply, air-
tight inner core. Fiberglass insulation of R4.2 encompass the core and a metalized, reinforced vapor barrier shall
surround the entire duct.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3100
Renton Technical College DUCTS & CASINGS FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3100 – 3
1. Pressure Rating: 6 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative.
2. Maximum Velocity: 5,000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
4. Thermal Resistance: 4.2 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.
2.03 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of galvanized steel.
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches 26
15 inches to 26 inches 24
28 inches to 36 inches 22
38 inches to 50 inches 20
52 inches to 84 inches 18
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches 24
15 inches to 26 inches 22
28 inches to 36 inches 20
38 inches to 50 inches 20
52 inches to 60 inches 18
62 inches to 84 inches 16
2.04 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate
B. Product Description: SMACNA "F" rated rigidity class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection
system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips.
2.05 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction Standards). Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing,
and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and
where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning
vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees
divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in
SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
F. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use
90-degree conical tee connections.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3100
Renton Technical College DUCTS & CASINGS FOR HVAC
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3100 – 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible.
B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent
construction dust from entering ductwork system.
C. Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller.
D. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
E. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
F. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swing so fan static pressure holds door in closed
position.
G. Install kitchen range hoods in accordance with NFPA 96.
H. Install residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for clean out.
I. Kitchen hood exhaust ducts: Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel or carbon steel
where ducts are concealed.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Install pitot tube
openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can with spring device or screw to prevent
air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring.
B. Connect [air outlets and inlets to supply ducts directly or with five foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use
flexible duct to change direction.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. Ductwork Material Schedule:
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
Supply (Heating Systems) Steel
Return and Relief Steel
General Exhaust Steel, Aluminum
B. Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule:
AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS
Constant Volume Supply 1 inch wg regardless of velocity.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3300
Renton Technical College AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3300 - 1
SECTION 23 3300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Back-draft dampers.
2. Duct access doors.
3. Volume control dampers.
4. Flexible duct connections.
5. Duct test holes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Execution and Product requirements for
connection and control of Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers for placement by this section.
2. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Requirements for duct construction and pressure
classifications.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
2. NFPA 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 555 - Standard for Safety for Fire Dampers.
2. UL 555C - Standard for Safety for Ceiling Dampers.
3. UL 555S - Standard for Safety for Smoke Dampers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers and duct access doors.
B. Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies and hardware used.
C. Product Data: Submit for the following. Include where applicable electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Flexible duct connections.
3. Volume control dampers.
4. Duct access doors.
D. Product Data: For fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, submit the following:
1. Include UL ratings, dynamic ratings, leakage, pressure drop and maximum pressure data.
2. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details.
3. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for Fire and Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3300
Renton Technical College AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3300 - 2
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.
B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels
clearly indicating manufacturer and material.
C. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage.
D. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials and finishes
during handling and installation to prevent damage.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one (1) year manufacturer warranty for duct accessories.
B. Include copy of the warranty certificate in Operations and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck WD
2. Ruskin CMBD2
B. Product Description: Multi-Blade, back-draft dampers: Parallel-action, gravity-balanced, galvanized16 gage thick
steel frame. Aluminum blades, maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades linked
together in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. Furnish dampers
with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Milcor 3208 or 3210
2. Elmdor
B. Access Doors: Bonderized steel, 20-gage doors and 16-gage frames, with flush screw driver operated cam latch,
fitted with concealed hinges, factory prime coated.
C. Access panels shall be Milcor Style AT for acoustical tile, Style K with expanded metal wings for plaster, Style M
for masonry, tile and drywall and style DW for gypsum board walls and ceilings.
D. Access doors and panels in fire rated construction shall have UL 1-1/2 hour B label.
2.03 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck.
2. Ruskin.
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3300
Renton Technical College AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3300 - 3
C. Splitter Dampers:
1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in both dimensions, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24
inches.
2. Blade: Fabricate of single double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge
or rod.
3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set
screw.
4. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center
and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame channel with suitable hardware.
E. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. On multiple blade dampers,
furnish oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Furnish closed end bearings on ducts having pressure
classification over 2 inches wg.
F. Quadrants:
1. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches furnish regulator at both ends.
4. Model ICS-385 Manufactured by Duro Dyne.
2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Duro-Dyne, Model Durolon.
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated
on Drawings.
C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming to NFPA 90A, minimum
density 30 oz per sq yd.
2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.
3. Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gage galvanized steel.
2.05 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Manufacturers:
B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Furnish extended neck fittings
to clear insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.
B. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.
C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural
features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and
Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.
B. Install back-draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated on Drawings.
C. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations and as indicated on Drawings:
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3300
Renton Technical College AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 23 3300 - 4
D. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as
indicated on Drawings. Review locations prior to fabrication.
E. Install temporary duct test holes where indicated on Drawings and required for testing and balancing purposes.
Cut or drill in ducts. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner’s representative.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3400
Renton Technical College FANS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 23 3400 – 1
SECTION 23 3400 - FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceiling fans.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Product requirements for hangers for placement by this
section.
2. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct accessories for placement by this
section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association:
1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
2. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
4. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
5. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
C. American Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 1060 - Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification Equipment Program.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 705 - Power Ventilators.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, ductwork and accessory
connections.
B. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point
plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics
and connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturers instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts
list, and wiring diagrams.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300,and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.
C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705.
D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204.
E. Energy Recovery Unit Wheel Energy Transfer Rating: Meet ARI 1060.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3400
Renton Technical College FANS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 23 3400 – 2
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer’s warranty for fans.
1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of fans for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Examine fan components bi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of fans, and controls checkout and adjustments.
Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced
by manufacturer of original equipment.
D. Perform work without removing fans from service during building normal occupied hours.
E. Provide emergency call back service during working hours for this maintenance period.
F. Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. Have
personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service, without unreasonable loss of time.
G. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision of manufacturer or original
installer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEILING FANS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Panasonic
2. Greenheck.
3. Loren Cook.
B. Ceiling mount, single speed ventilation fan shall be UL and CUL listed for ceiling mounting. Fan shall also be
energy star® certified, with a built-in speed selector. The motor shall be totally enclosed with a brushless ECM
motor engineered to run continuously. ECM motor speed shall automatically increase when the fan senses static
pressure to maintain selected cfm. Power rating shall be 120v/60hz. Duct diameter shall be no less than 6". Fan
can be used to comply with ASHRAE 62.2, LEED and WA State Energy Code.
C. Provide wall mounted on/off toggle switch for fan control.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Secure roof fans and gravity ventilators with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb and structure.
B. Suspended Cabinet Fans: Install flexible connections between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of
connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.
C. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhaust fans and gravity ventilators used in relief air
applications.
D. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling fans and as indicated on Drawings.
E. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
F. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.
G. Install backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated on Drawings.
H. Provide sheaves required for final air balance.
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3400
Renton Technical College FANS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 23 3400 – 3
3.03 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of fan cabinet.
B. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures.
C. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run
under observation.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3700
Renton Technical College AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 23 3700 – 1
SECTION 23 3700 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Diffusers.
2. Grilles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Volume dampers for inlets and outlets.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size,
location, application, and noise level.
B. Test Reports: Rating of air outlet and inlet performance.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for air outlets and inlets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Model MCD
2. Tuttle and Bailey
B. Type: Square, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree, four-way pattern.
C. Frame: Surface mount or inverted T-bar type.
D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel white finish.
E. Accessories: Radial opposed-blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from
diffuser face.
2.02 CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Manufacturer:
1. Titus 50F
2. Tuttle and Bailey
Building J First Floor Remodel Phase 1 23 3700
Renton Technical College AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 23 3700 – 2
B. Return grilles shall be the sizes and mounting types as shown on the schedule. Return grilles must provide a free
area of at least 90%. Outer borders shall be constructed of heavy extruded aluminum with a thickness of 0.040-
0.050 inch and shall have countersunk screw holes for a neat appearance. Border width shall be 1¼ inches on all
sides and shall be interlocked at the four corners and mechanically staked to form a rigid frame. Aluminum grid
shall be 1 x 1 x 1 inch.
C. The grille finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify inlet and outlet locations.
B. Verify ceiling and wall systems are ready for installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
B. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or not dampers are furnished
as part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly.
C. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural
features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 1
SECTION 26 05 00 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supervision, and services required for the construction, installation,
connection, testing and operation of electrical work described herein and shown on the Drawings. This section
applies to all Division 26, 27 and 28 sections.
B. General Requirements: The provisions and intent of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 01
apply to Work in this section.
1.02 PERMITS
A. Purchase the necessary permits, including State of Washington Labor and Industries permit fees, licenses and
approvals required for execution of this work and include all costs in the bid.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Execute electrical work in strict accordance with the 2020 National Electrical Code, and the current Washington
State Electrical Rules and Regulations, and local ordinances and regulations.
B. Conform to applicable industry standards, UL standards, NEMA standards, and other standards as noted.
1. Notify the A/E of deviations in Contract Documents to applicable codes and ordinances prior to installation of
the Work. Perform changes in the Work after initial installation due to requirements of code enforcing
agencies at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. If conflict occurs between legally adopted codes and the Contract Documents, the codes prevail, except that
this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with requirements of the Contract
Documents which may exceed code requirements and not contrary to same.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and with additional requirements indicated in this article.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit prior to fabrication of assemblies and delivery of purchased items.
2. Submit complete at one time. Partial product submittals not acceptable and will be returned not reviewed.
3. Clearly mark catalog pages, equipment, and model number to be used. Note required accessories.
4. Confirm with A/E whether product data may be submitted electronically in lieu of physical submittal. Format
organization and requirements shall follow that of a physical submittal. See Item 5. below.
5. Format:
a. Assemble submittals in 3-ring binders. Use multiple binders if pages in a single binder would exceed 2-
1/2 inch thickness. Separate binders for each category, such as Electrical, Communications, and Fire
Alarm and Security. Where one subject matter encompasses more than one binder, differentiate by
volume numbers. Include indexed tabs for each binder.
b. Include overall table of contents of items submitted, organized by specification section.
c. Include heavy, tabbed divider sheet for each specification section, with specification section number and
title on tab. Include table of contents for each specification section, including catalog numbers or
drawing numbers if appropriate.
d. Fold drawings to 8-1/2-inch size and bind as above (with reinforcing at punched holes) or place in clear
plastic holder designed for 3 ring binders.
e. Include contractor and manufacturer’s representative contact information for each product.
6. Identify on cover and spine for each binder with printed title “ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS”, names of project,
Owner, general contractor, electrical subcontractor, Architect, and electrical engineer, and year of project
completion.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Confirm with A/E whether shop drawings may be submitted electronically in lieu of physical drawings. Format
organization and requirements shall follow that of physical shop drawings.
2. Submit as specified in the individual specification sections. Submit minimum 30 days prior to starting
fabrication on installation work. Do not fabricate or install until reviewed by the A/E. Include complete location
dimensions, and hanger and support sizes and dimensions.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 2
3. “Typical” drawings and wiring diagrams not accepted unless they specifically apply to this project.
4. Drawings shall be drawn at sufficient scale to show details clearly on same size sheets as Drawings.
5. Show required coordination with work of other trades.
6. Identify details and show their locations in Project.
7. Include description of configuration and operation of proposed systems.
8. Include outline drawings of proposed equipment in plan and elevation views including overall dimensions,
weights, and clearance required.
9. Include one-line electrical diagrams required for control and sensing.
10. CAD Drawings: AutoCAD floor plan backgrounds are available in electric format and shall be requested from
the A/E.
11. Direct use of the Drawings as the basis of Contractor’s prepared Shop Drawings not acceptable.
D. Approval: Approval of a manufacturer’s name or product by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in detail with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
E. Re-Submittals: Clearly identify re-submittals. Provide revised tabs, indexes, page renumbering, and other formats
to interface with original submittal. Identify changes and include date for project tracking.
F. Test reports and Certificates: Submit as a package prior to Substantial Completion.
G. Certifications: Submit written certifications from the governing building authorities stating that work has been
inspected and accepted and complies with applicable codes and ordinances.
H. Record Drawings: Comply with Article “Record Drawings” in this section.
I. Schedule of Values:
1. Comply with the requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements as indicated in this paragraph.
2. Include costs in Schedule of Values as follows:
a. Mobilization.
b. Submittals.
c. Electrical Permit.
d. Electrical Site – Utility Provisions, Material.
e. Electrical Site – Utility Provisions, Labor.
f. Electrical Site – Lighting Rough In & Wiring, Material.
g. Electrical Site – Lighting Rough In & Wiring, Labor.
h. Electrical Site – Power Rough-in & Wiring, Material.
i. Electrical Site – Power Rough-in & Wiring, Labor.
j. Lighting Systems – Fixtures & Lamps Material.
k. Lighting Systems – Fixtures & Lamps Labor.
l. Lighting Systems – Branch Circuit Rough-in & Wiring, Material.
m. Lighting Systems – Branch Circuit Rough-in & Wiring, Labor.
n. Lighting Systems – Devices & Trim, Material.
o. Lighting Systems – Devices & Trim, Labor.
p. Power Systems – Switchgear, Disconnects, Material.
q. Power Systems – Switchgear, Disconnects, Labor.
r. Power Systems – Feeder Rough-in, Material.
s. Power Systems – Feeder Rough-in, Labor.
t. Power Systems – Equipment Connections.
u. Power Systems – Branch Circuit Rough-in & Wiring, Material.
v. Power Systems – Branch Circuit Rough-in & Wiring, Labor.
w. Power Systems – Devices & Trim, Material.
x. Power Systems – Devices & Trim, Labor.
y. Punch List and Close Out.
z. Commissioning and Training
1.05 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Division 01 for definitions and abbreviations. Additional definitions and abbreviations are as follows.
B. “Approved” or “Approval” means written approval by the owner or “Owner’s agent” (A/E).
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 3
C. “Codes” means AHJ adopted codes, rules, and ordinances and additional codes as specified herein.
D. “Concealed” means spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings, below floors, between double walls, furred-in
areas, pipe and duct shafts, and similar spaces.
E. The word “Contractor”, as used in Division 26 sections, means the electrical subcontractor.
F. “Coordination”, “Coordinating”, and “Coordinate” means to bring, or the bringing, into a common action, movement,
or combination so as to act together in a smooth concerted way.
G. “Directed”, “Requested”, “Accepted”, and Similar Terms means these terms imply “by the A/E” unless otherwise
indicated.
H. “Exposed” means open to view. For example, raceways installed in a tunnel or raceways installed in a room and
not covered by other construction.
I. “Furnish” means supply and deliver to the project site ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar activities.
J. “Indicated” and “Indicated on the Drawings” means shown on Drawings by notes, graphics, or schedules, or written
into other portions of Contract Documents. Terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled” and “specified” have same
meanings as “indicated” and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information.
K. “Install” means to place in position for service or use. Includes operations at project site, such as unloading,
unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, preserving, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar activities.
L. “Provide” means furnish and install for a complete, finished, and operable system and ready for intended use.
M. “Shop Drawings” means Document which fully details equipment and intended installation relative to this specific
Project.
N. “Substantial Completion” shall mean that the entire project (or readily definable portion thereof if so designated in the
Contracted Documents) is acceptable to code enforcement authorities and to extent required by such authorities,
has been inspected and approved by such authorities, and is suitable for occupancy by the Owner or occupant for
the purpose intended. Refer to Division 00 and 01 for additional requirements.
O. “Work” or “Project” means entire scope of work required by the Contract Documents.
P. Abbreviations:
A/E Architect
AHJ Authorities Having Jurisdiction
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
C Degrees Celsius
ETL Environmental Technology Laboratory
F Degrees Fahrenheit
FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
IBC International Building Code
NEC National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 (latest adopted edition with Amendments)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
RMS Root Mean Square
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
V Volts
1.06 MATERIALS
A. Where 2 or more manufacturers are listed, select for use any of those listed. The first mentioned, in general, was
used as the basis of design. Bids on any manufacturer named acceptable as long as that manufacturer meets every
aspect of the Contract Documents. Note that equipment layout is based on equipment listed in equipment
schedules.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 4
B. Where other than the first named manufacturer is selected, include cost of resulting work and redesign of associated
services and structure. Include redesign drawings with Shop Drawings.
C. Ensure that equipment will fit within available space, including manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
1.07 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
A. Materials and Equipment: UL listed and labeled or other AHJ approved testing laboratory and in compliance with
other industry standards as specified.
B. Equipment shall be manufacture’s regularly catalogued items and shall be supplied as a complete unit in accordance
with manufacturer’s standard specifications and any optional items required for proper installation for equipment
unless otherwise noted. Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and best trade practices.
C. Products shall be new unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
D. Fabricator and Manufacturer Qualifications: Specialists with at least 5 years experience and regularly engaged in
manufacture of equipment and materials specified.
E. Furnish products of a single manufacturer for items which are used in quantity. A Product, for the purpose of this
paragraph, is an assembly of components such as switchboards, transformers, panelboards, and similar items.
Materials such as wire and cable, raceways, outlet boxes, and similar items not requiring maintenance are not
included in the single manufacturer requirement of this paragraph.
F. Installer Qualifications: Specialists with at least 5 years experience and regularly engaged in the installation of the
system, equipment, and materials specified. Where required by the AHJ, employ licensed trades persons.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, using means and methods
to prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Deliver products to site in manufacturer’s original containers, complete with labels.
C. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are
undamaged and properly protected.
D. Store products subject to damage by weather conditions above ground, under cover in weathertight enclosure, with
ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by
manufacturer’s instructions.
1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this article.
B. Substitutions will be considered following bid award only when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of
the Contractor.
C. Where “Manufacturer” paragraphs include the words "or approved", prior approval of the proposed substitution is
required. The A/E is sole judge of quality of proposed substitution.
D. When the A/E approves a substitution request, the approval is given with the understanding that the Bidder:
1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified
Product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be
complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.
E. Whenever a Product is described by detail, specification, trade name, manufacturer's name or catalog reference,
use only such Product, unless written approval is given for substitution prior to bid. Submit written requests on
substitution request form included in Division 01. Approved substituted manufacturers will be listed by Addendum.
F. Provide as specified certain products, materials, and systems where “manufacturer” paragraphs are followed by the
words “no substitutions”.
G. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or product data submittals,
without separate written prior approval, or when approval will require revision to the Contract Documents.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 5
1.10 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. General: The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Complete details of building features which affect electrical
installation may not be shown. For additional details, refer to other Contract Documents. Report any discrepancies
to the A/E along with suggested revisions. Obtain written response from the A/E before proceeding with changes.
B. Depiction of Work: Drawings do not show the exact characteristics of the work including, physical arrangement of
equipment, lengths of wiring or conduit runs. Base work on actual field measurements and conditions. Provide work
required to complete the installation.
C. Dimensions: Do not scale drawings. Dimensional accuracy is not guaranteed, and field verification of dimensions,
locations, and levels to suit field conditions is required.
D. Since the Drawings of floor, wall, and ceiling installation, are made at small scale, outlets, devices, equipment, and
similar items are indicated only in their approximate location. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors,
walls, and ceilings where not dimensioned and coordinate such locations with work of other trades to prevent
interferences.
E. Discrepancies: Field verify dimensions and existing conditions prior to performing work. Bring to the A/E’s attention
any discrepancies within the Contract Documents and between the Contract Documents and field conditions. Also
for any design and layout changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to the Contractor’s work
(equipment and material purchasing and installation). Any corrective work required by the Contractor after his
discovery of such discrepancies, inconsistencies, or ambiguities shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Specifications: These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. The imperative language
is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words “shall be” are included by inference
where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases.
1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01, with additional requirements as indicated in this article.
B. Prepare Record Drawings. Record Drawings shall be new blue line prints (pencil and black pen not acceptable) and
shall show the measured locations of portions of the Work and changes the Contractor has made.
C. Record corrections and changes made during the progress of the work, showing work as actually installed. In
general, tolerance plus or minus 1’-0” from actual location. Indicate installed locations for underground raceways.
Neatly hand-draft on daily basis. Keep readily available at project site. Use latest revisions and keep neat and
clean. Do not use Contractor’s working drawings.
D. Record Drawings are subject to review by the A/E on a regular basis throughout construction. At end of
construction, check drawings for completeness and accuracy.
E. Drawings shall show addendum items, change orders, clarifications, supplemental instructions, and deviations from
the Drawings.
F. Per project closeout procedures, submit in AutoCAD format along with corrected blue line drawings. Each sheet
shall be noted as “RECORD DRAWING”.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Division 26 and 28 work with other trades.
B. Be aware of restricted space for installation of electrical systems. Include offsets and perform rerouting and
coordination to fit elements in available space. Include provisions for such requirements in bid.
C. Electrical equipment and systems shown are based on existing drawings as available and on limited project site
observations to the extent possible under current conditions. Field verify existing conditions prior to commencement
of work. Obtain specific locations of structural and architectural features or equipment items from referenced
drawings, field measurements, or trade providing material or equipment.
D. Coordinate raceway installations to clear light fixtures and electrical cable trays. Include clearance over light fixtures
to allow removal and replacement. Include minimum 6-inch clearance above and to sides of cable trays.
E. Existing Conditions:
1. General Construction:
a. Installation of electrical work will require openings, removal and replacement of ceilings, sleeves, and
restoration of general construction to match existing. Some work occurs in areas not requiring
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 6
alterations as part of architectural work. Coordinate new openings and restoration work so that there is
no additional cost to the Owner.
b. General construction work shown on the architectural drawings may require removal, relocation, and
reinstallation of existing electrical work. Since existing conditions cannot be completely detailed on the
Drawings, survey the site and perform required Work at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. This project may require work in the presence of asbestos containing material (ACM). Division 26 does not
provide for or cover the identification, removal, encapsulation, or disposal of such material. If the presence of
ACM is suspected, notify the general contractor prior to proceeding with in the vicinity of ACM.
F. Be responsible for beam penetrations as they relate to the electrical work. Submit sizes and locations to the
structural engineer for review and determination of structural details.
G. Coordinate attachments to structure to verify that attachment points on equipment and structure can accept seismic,
weight, and other loads imposed.
H. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for location of expansion and seismic joints. Provide flexible loops for
raceways and cable trays crossing expansion and seismic joints.
1.13 WORKMANSHIP
A. Work shall be in accordance with best trade practices. Remove substandard workmanship and provide new material
at no extra cost to the Owner.
1.14 SITE VISIT
A. The Contractor shall visit site during bidding period to note conditions affecting installation of Work. No additional
charges allowed due to failure to adequately review conditions.
B. Investigate each space through which equipment must be moved. Where necessary, arrange with equipment
manufacturers to ship equipment in sections with suitable dimensions for moving through restricted spaces. For
movement through occupied spaces, ascertain from the Owner as acceptable times of day or night that movement
could occur. Include costs in bid for off hours labor, reassembly, and field testing.
1.15 CERTIFICATION
A. By submitting a bid for the electrical systems, the Contractor and his subcontractors acknowledge and certify the
following:
1. That they have carefully examined and fully understand the Drawings and Specifications (including but not
limited to architectural, site, utility, mechanical, structural and electrical drawings and specifications. In
addition, they have determined that the Drawings and Specifications are adequate to complete the electrical
systems and that they can provide a complete finished and operable system in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
2. That they have had a reasonable opportunity to discover any ambiguities in the Contract Documents and such
ambiguities have been brought to the attention of the A/E in writing prior to submitting the bid.
3. That they have reviewed the project progress schedule with the general contractor, fully understand the
schedule, and they have verified, prior to submitting a bid, availability of necessary labor and materials,
including supervision and office backup, and can comply with the schedule requirements.
4. That there may be changes to the scope of work and that they understand that any proposal submitted for
performance of additional work shall include costs associated with such change including but not limited to
labor, materials, subcontracts, equipment, taxes, fees, schedule impact, loss of efficiency, supervision,
overhead and profit.
5. That the Contract requires them to coordinate their work with that of other trades and that responsibility for
coordination includes rerouting, offsets, and similar provisions, to fit Work and address manufacturer’s
recommended clearances for service access, maintenance, and replacement of equipment in a manner that is
compatible with work of other trades in the same area.
6. That routing of elements of electrical systems shown on the Drawings is schematic only and that offsets and
rerouting probably will be required in installation and that labor and materials have been included for such in
their bids.
7. That they have consulted with affected utilities and included in their bids labor and materials to meet
requirements which may be imposed by each utility and have included in their bids costs and fees to be paid
to such utilities, including temporary services and temporary and permanent connections unless specifically
excluded in the Contract Documents.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 7 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 7
8. That they understand submittals of material and equipment to the A/E is for the purpose of establishing what
they are providing for the project. Any review undertaken by the A/E does not relieve them of their
responsibilities to furnish and install materials and equipment required for work in the project nor does such
review relieve them of their responsibilities for coordination with other trades and designers to ensure that
such materials and equipment will fit and be suitable for purpose intended.
9. That they agree to receive payment for bid amounts as full compensation for furnishing materials and labor
which may be required in prosecution and completion of work required under the Contract Documents, and in
respects to complete the contract work to the satisfaction of the A/E.
10. That they include in their bids costs to furnish bonds as specified in the Contract Documents.
1.16 WARRANTY
A. Conform to requirements in General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01. Where not so
prescribed or defined, the period shall be 1 year. Warranty periods within Division 26 and 28 shall not commence
until Substantial Completion. Contractor shall extend longer warranties specified in other sections.
1.17 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR (FOIC)
A. Material Handling and Delivery: Coordinate delivery of FOIC equipment. Receive, off load, transport, store, hoist,
unpack, dispose of packing, same as for other project equipment arriving at job site. Requirements of the Contract
Documents apply to FOIC equipment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Obtain from the Owner operation and maintenance data for the FOIC equipment
and incorporate them into the Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
C. Start-up and Warranty:
1. FOIC equipment suppliers will pass on to the Contractor start-up information, maintenance and parts
information, and warranty provisions of their products in accordance with the equipment suppliers contract
requirements. Organize and coordinate start-up and warranty requirements for the FOIC equipment.
2. Include one year warranty on FOIC equipment starting at Substantial Completion regardless of shorter time
limits by FOIC suppliers.
1.18 DEMONSTRATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this article.
B. Following installation of electrical work and prior to final acceptance, demonstrate that equipment and systems
operate as indicated in the Contract Documents and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Perform in presence of the A/E and Owner’s representative, unless otherwise directed by the A/E. Give minimum 1
week notice prior to demonstrations.
D. Provide instruments and personnel required to conduct demonstrations.
1.19 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01.
B. Prepare list of items that are not complete prior to asking for a substantial completion review by the A/E.
1.20 ALTERNATES
A. General: See Bid Form and Alternates described in Division 01 for possible effect on work of Division 26.
1.21 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING UTILITY SERVICES
A. Shutdown Duration: Comply with requirements in Division 01. Perform work without shutdown of more than 4-hour
duration of existing electrical systems. Schedule each shutdown in writing with the Owner at least 14 days in
advance of shutdown and obtain advance written approval from the Owner.
B. Temporary Services: Provide during necessary interruptions of existing utilities.
C. Owner Occupancy:
1. Perform work in the existing building with respect for the necessity of the Owner’s employees to perform their
regular work.
2. Plan installation of new work and connections to existing work to assure minimum interference with regular
operation of existing facilities. Do not remove, disconnect, or shutdown systems without prior review by the
Owner to confirm that areas needed to remain in operation are not affected.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 8 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 8
3. Provide temporary, wiring, lighting, and similar systems and connect to existing systems to keep existing
electrical systems in operation to service areas that need to remain occupied.
1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and materials furnished under Division 26.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this article.
C. Submit 4 copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review at least 4 weeks prior to Substantial Completion
date. Assemble Operation and Maintenance Manual in 3-ring binder(s). Use multiple binders if pages in a single
binder would exceed 2-1/2-inch thickness. Separate binders for each category, such as Electrical, Communications,
and Fire Alarm and Security. Where one subject matter encompasses more than one binder, differentiate by volume
numbers. Include indexed tabs for each binder. Engrave cover with the project title in 1/2-inch-high letters and
name and address of the Contractor in 1/4-inch-high letters. Provide same information in 1/8-inch-high letters on
spine.
D. Include complete cleaning and servicing data complied in clearly and easily understandable form. Include serial
numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, motor ratings, and similar information.
Each item of equipment shall have its own individual sheet. (Example: If 2 items of equipment A and D appear on
the same sheet, individual sheet shall be included for each unit specified).
E. Include the Following Information:
1. Identifying name and mark number.
2. Certified outline drawings and Shop Drawings.
3. Parts list.
4. Performance curves and data.
5. Wiring diagrams.
6. Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions.
7. Vendor's name, address and telephone number for all parts and equipment.
8. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor performing the work.
9. Test reports.
10. Product data and Record Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish specified items acceptable to AHJ as suitable for intended use.
B. Furnish new materials, unless otherwise indicated, free from defects and the standard products of reputable
manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment.
C. Furnish materials of the same type or classification and used for the same purpose by the same manufacturer.
D. Materials and Equipment: Shall be UL listed and labeled or other AHJ approved testing laboratory, approved by
inspection authorities, and rated by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
E. Remove rejected or damaged material from site.
F. Samples may be required for non-standard or substituted items before installation. Submit samples as required in
specific specification sections.
G. Furnish required items necessary for installation and testing procedures.
2.02 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
A. Posted Operating Instructions: Furnish simplified, consolidated equipment control and power diagrams. Graphically
represent entire system and actual equipment installed. Include concise written instructions on how to start and stop
systems. Show settings and conditions to be observed. Indicate what control adjustments are to be made or
maintained by the operator.
1. Include control diagrams and specific operating instructions.
2. Indicate how to energize each major component of systems. Show what action must be taken in an
emergency, how to restore power following an outage, and what precautions to be taken when maintenance is
required.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 9 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 9
3. Include photographic or comparable non-fading reproductions, either framed under glass or encased in non-
discoloring plastic.
4. Include one-line diagrams of electric power distribution riser.
B. Copies of operating instructions shall be used with Operation and Maintenance Manuals as basis in training Owner's
employees in the operation and maintenance of systems and related installed equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of the various sections. Do not install until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSPECTIONS
A. Confirm that installations have been inspected before enclosure within building features, buried, or otherwise hidden
from view. Pay costs associated with uncovering or exposing installations and features not previously inspected and
for repair to exposed surfaces.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to prevent damage as work is installed.
B. Obtain equipment roughing-in dimensions from approved Shop Drawings or actual measurements.
C. Be familiar with the location of other trade's equipment. Eliminate conflicts. Check door swings before installing
switches. Locate switches on strike side of doors unless noted otherwise.
D. Layout electrical work in advance of construction to eliminate unnecessary cutting, drilling, channeling, and similar
activities. Where such cutting, drilling, channeling and similar activities become necessary for proper installation,
perform with care using skilled mechanics of trades involved. Repair damage to building and equipment at no
additional cost to the Owner.
E. Provide all openings required for the electrical work. Perform cutting work of other trades only with consent of that
trade. Cutting structural members not permitted without consent of the A/E.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work as specified and in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Where these
conflict, manufacturer's instructions govern.
B. Review Architectural, Mechanical and other applicable drawings and applicable Shop Drawings to prevent switches,
outlets, and other equipment from being hidden behind doors, cabinets, counters, heating equipment, and similar
items, or from being located in whiteboards, tackboards, glass panels, and similar items. Relocate electrical devices
and connections as directed by the A/E at no additional cost to the Owner if the work is not properly coordinated.
C. Where conduit, outlets, and apparatus are encased in concrete, locate and secure at point of installation. Check
locations of electrical items before and after concrete and masonry installation and relocate displaced items.
D. Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, and similar items required for installation of Work specified in this
division.
3.05 WORKMANSHIP
A. Work and materials will be subject to observation at any time by the Owner and the A/E.
B. Install equipment and material in a neat and workmanlike manner and align, level and adjust for satisfactory
operation. Install equipment so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair.
Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide calibrated torque wrenches
and screwdrivers as required.
C. Cutting and Patching: Do not weld to, cut, or notch structural members or building surfaces without approval of the
A/E. Restore surfaces neatly to original condition after cutting, channeling, chasing, and drilling of walls, partitions,
ceilings, paving, and anchorage of conduit, raceways, and other electrical equipment.
3.06 WELDING, CUTTING, AND DRILLING
A. Perform in accordance with American Welding Society Standards.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 10 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 10
3.07 EXCAVATION FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Perform earthwork required for installation of electrical work below grade. Coordinate with requirements in Division
02.
B. Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in manner which will ensure that no damage or
service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling. Perform excavation in a manner which protects walls,
footings, and other structural members from being disturbed or damaged in any way.
C. Protect persons from injury at excavations by barricades, warnings, and illumination.
D. Coordinate excavations with weather conditions to minimize possibility of washouts, settlements and other damages
and hazards.
E. Do not excavate until Work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion
of backfilling will be minimum. Refer to other sections for additional requirements for excavating.
F. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation in manner which will not interfere with or damage excavation,
other work or excavated material.
G. Retain excavated material which complies with requirements for backfill material. Dispose of excavated material
which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material.
Remove unused material from project site and dispose of in lawful manner.
3.08 BACKFILL
A. For Buried Conduit or Cable (Other than Concrete Encased): Two-inch thickness of sand or pea gravel below, on
sides of, and over conduit or cable.
B. For Trench Backfill to within 6 Inches of Final Grade: Soil material suitable for compacting to required densities.
C. For Top 6 Inches of Excavation: Topsoil except where excavations occur below paved or gravel area.
D. Backfill excavations in 8-inch-high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to densities of 90 percent in
unpaved areas and 95 percent in building and under paved areas (percent of maximum density, ASTM D 1557),
using power-driven compaction equipment.
E. Subsidence: Where subsidence is measurable or observable at electrical work excavations during general project
warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace
surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work to
eliminate evidence of restoration.
3.09 CONCRETE BASES
A. Unless noted otherwise, provide 4-inch-high reinforced concrete bases for floor mounted and floor standing electrical
equipment, including generators, transformers, switchgear, battery racks, motor control centers, and similar
equipment. Extend bases 4 inches beyond equipment or mounting rails in each direction unless noted otherwise on
the Drawings.
B. Concrete bases shall be provided under Division 26. Coordinate size and location of bases and provide required
anchor bolts, sleeves, and templates required to obtain proper installation.
C. Provide concrete lids and vaults for power company furnished pad mounted transformers in accordance with power
company clearance requirements.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment, conduit, and fittings and remove packing cartons and other debris created by Division 26 Work.
B. Before Substantial Completion, carefully clean equipment, fixtures, exposed raceways and similar items. Remove
construction labels, dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, and similar items. Clean fixtures, interiors and
exteriors of equipment and raceways.
C. The premises must be kept free of accumulated materials, rubbish and debris at all times. Surplus material and
equipment must not be stored at the job site.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide nameplates and decals required to identify equipment and components, comply with requirements in
Section 26 05 53.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 00
Renton Technical College GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 11 of 11
September 30, 2022 26 05 00 - 11
B. Mount operating instructions and diagrams near equipment or elsewhere as otherwise designated by the Owner.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect equipment during and after electrical hookup, painting, and final testing.
3.13 TESTING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 08 00.
3.14 PROJECT TRAINING
A. Upon completion and testing of equipment and system installation, assemble equipment factory representatives and
subcontractors for system training with Owner's representatives as required in specific specification sections.
B. Each representative and subcontractor shall assist in start-up, check out, and training for their respective system and
remain on-site until the total system operation is thoroughly reviewed by the Owner's representatives and are
thoroughly trained. Return for additional training sessions as required to completely train Owner's Representatives.
C. Factory representative and system subcontractor shall give personal instruction on operating and maintenance of
their equipment to the Owner's maintenance and operation personnel. To certify acceptance of operation and
instruction by the Owner's representative, prepare a written statement.
D. Submit copy of acceptance to A/E.
3.15 PUNCHLIST AND FINAL REVIEWS
A. At the time of punchlist and final reviews, the project electrical foreman shall accompany the reviewing party, and
remove coverplates, panel covers, and other access panels as requested to allow review of entire electrical system.
3.16 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Engineering services required beyond the final completion date shall be paid by the Contractor at a rate of $125 per
hour.
B. Punchlists will be done at Substantial Completion and final completion dates. Submit Record Drawings and final
Operation and Maintenance Manuals prior to Substantial Completion date. Subsequent reviews shall be paid by the
Contractor at a rate of $125 per hour.
3.17 COMMISSIONING
A. The equipment and systems referenced in this section are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General
Commissioning Requirements and Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems. The contractor has
specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation.
Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 11
Renton Technical College ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 05 11 - 1
SECTION 26 05 11 – ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes final electrical connection to equipment having electrical requirements. Contractor shall
make final connections for Owner furnished equipment including switches, receptacles, and similar items. See other
applicable specification sections for building temperature control wiring requirements specified in Divisions 22, and
23.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
C. Connection to Equipment Specified in Divisions 22, and 23 as Follows unless Specified Otherwise in Divisions 22,
and 23:
1. For motorized only equipment with built-in controllers (packaged equipment), Connect power and provide an
external disconnect at equipment. Division 23 will provide control wiring.
2. For motorized only equipment with external controller (non-packaged equipment), provide external motor
controller, disconnect switch, and make power wiring complete to equipment. Division 23 will provide control
wiring.
3. For electric duct heaters with built-in controllers (packaged type equipment), connect power complete and
provide external disconnect switch at equipment. Division 23 will provide control wiring.
4. For electric duct heaters with remote controllers (non-packaged type equipment), provide external controller,
disconnect switch, and make power wiring to equipment. Division 23 will provide control wiring.
5. For combination motorized and electric heating packaged units specified with built in controllers and specified
with “single point electrical connection” under Division 23, connect power and provide external disconnect
switch. Division 23 will provide control wiring.
6. For equipment requiring a full voltage non-reversing starter, include as a combination disconnect unit.
D. Refer to Division 23 sections for control system wiring.
E. Refer to sections of other divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements.
F. Make final connection to kitchen equipment.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and installation of electrical
power connections.
C. Comply with applicable NEMA standards and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology herein. Comply
with NEC for workmanship and installation requirements and to applicable Division 26 sections.
D. UL Labels: Provide electrical connection products and materials which have been UL listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS MATERIALS
A. For each electrical connection indicated, include complete assembly of materials, including but not limited to,
raceways, conductors, cords, cord caps, wiring devices, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating
tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories to complete
splices, terminations, and connections.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 for wires and cables, Section 26 05 33 for raceway systems, and
Section 26 27 26 for wiring devices.
C. Include Final Connections for Equipment Consistent with the Following:
1. Permanently Installed Fixed Equipment: Flexible seal-tite conduit from branch circuit terminal equipment, and
raceway to equipment, control cabinet, terminal junction box, and wiring terminals. Totally enclose wiring in
raceway.
2. Movable and/or Portable Equipment: Wiring device, cord cap, and multi-conductor cord suitable for
equipment and in accordance with NEC requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 11
Renton Technical College ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 05 11 - 2
3. Other methods as required by NEC and as required by special equipment and field conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with connector manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized
industry practices and complying with requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and wiring diagrams.
C. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with installed equipment.
D. Verify electrical loads (voltage, phase, full load amperes, number and point of connections, minimum circuit
ampacity, and similar characteristics) for equipment furnished under other divisions, by reviewing respective shop
drawings furnished under each division. Meet with each subcontractor furnishing equipment requiring electrical
service and review equipment electrical characteristics. Report variances from electrical characteristics noted on
electrical drawings to the A/E before proceeding with rough work.
E. Obtain and review equipment submittals and shop drawings to determine particular final connection requirements
before rough-in begins for each equipment item.
F. Comply with requirements in Section 24 05 53 for identification of electrical power supply conductor terminations.
3.02 STARTERS (CONTROLLERS)
A. Install non-packaged starters and wiring devices near motors or as indicated on the Drawings. Securely support and
anchor in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Locate for proper operational access, including
visibility for safety.
3.03 PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL CONTROLS
A. Provide 120 Volt, 20 Amp circuit at locations required and described in Section 23 09 00. Coordinate exact locations
prior to installation.
B. Install power metering equipment at panelboards and switchboards furnished by control system subcontractor at
locations required and described in Section 23 09 00.
3.04 MECHANICAL - ELECTRICAL INTERFACE SCHEDULE
A. See Mechanical - Electrical Interface Schedule at Specification Section 23 05 13, paragraph 3.6. Comply with all
requirements referenced as Division 26.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 12
Renton Technical College ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 05 12 - 1
SECTION 26 05 12 – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes demolition of existing electrical work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county and state codes and ordinances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Dust Control: Provide protective measures to minimize transfer of noise, dust, dirt, and refuse to adjacent areas of
building. Such measure may include dust tight barriers, temporary walls, portable exhaust fans, vacuum systems,
and temporary partitioning.
B. Extent: Keep areas of demolition as clean and orderly as physically possible. Do not allow demolition debris to
accumulate. Gather debris and dispose daily. Broom or vacuum-clean work areas on daily basis.
C. Protection: Protect existing equipment, furnishing, and systems with protective coverings. Protect finished surfaces
including floors, ceilings, and walls.
3.02 DAMAGES
A. Repairs: Promptly repair damage to existing surfaces, equipment, finishes, or adjacent facilities at no cost to the
Owner and to the satisfaction of the A/E and the Owner.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. General: Provide demolition work required in existing building for removal of existing electrical equipment,
raceways, and conductors and for installation of new electrical equipment, raceways, and conductors. Relocate and
modify existing electrical equipment, raceways and conductors as required by general construction alterations and
by installation of new electrical equipment, raceways, and conductors in existing building to achieve a complete and
functioning installation as defined in the Contract Documents.
B. Extent: Remove and dispose of existing materials indicated in the Contract Documents to be removed.
C. Reuse: Do not reuse existing products unless indicated on the Drawings.
D. Materials to Owner: Deliver items to the Owner’s Representative as indicated in the Contract Documents.
E. Materials to Contractor: Materials other than those reserved by the Owner.
F. Existing Conditions: Comply with requirements in Division 01. Verify specific demolition work and operating
conditions to be encountered from on-site review and coordination with the Owner. Maintain service to existing
equipment and devices during new construction work as required by construction sequencing/scheduling provisions.
In areas adjacent to new construction work, provide temporary services as necessary to meet these conditions.
Protect active conductors encountered. Notify the A/E of utilities encountered whose services are not known.
G. Repair of Damages to Underground Utilities: Exact location of existing underground utilities is not definitely known.
Should any underground utilities be damaged in excavations, restore such utilities without additional cost to the
Owner.
H. Drilling of Concrete: Drill openings through existing concrete with diamond tipped rotary core-drilling equipment or
carbide tipped drills. In existing post tensioned slabs, locate and mark post tensioned strand locations with
subsurface interface radar type locating equipment prior to drilling, cutting, and sawing operations.
I. Saw-Cutting of Concrete: Saw cut through existing concrete with diamond tipped or carbide tipped saw blade. In
existing post tensioned slabs, locate and mark post tensioned strand locations with subsurface interface radar type
locating equipment prior to drilling, cutting, and sawing operations.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 12
Renton Technical College ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 05 12 - 2
3.04 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site unless
reinstalled or delivered to the Owner as indicated in the Contract Documents. Transport and legally dispose of
material off site.
B. Burning: Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.05 CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR
A. Clean-Up: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site.
Remove protection and leave interior areas clean.
B. Repair: Repair demolition performed in excess of that required at no additional cost to Owner. Return structures
and surfaces to conditions existing prior to commencement of demolition work or as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 19
Renton Technical College LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 26 05 19 – LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes wire, cable, splices, and terminations for systems 600 Volts and less and associated
appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
C. The word “Cable” in this section relates to wire only. It does not infer Metal Clad Cable. See Specification 26 0521
METAL CLAD CABLES for information on this wiring method, if approved for use on this project.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. UL 83, Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
C. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wire and cable. Electrical wire and cable
UL listed and labeled.
D. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Cable Engineers Association standards pertaining to materials,
construction and testing of wire and cable.
E. Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM and IEEE standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of wire, cable, and appurtenance.
C. Test Reports:
1. Field test reports.
2. Submit completed copy of reports and include copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER AND LIGHTING CIRCUITS
A. Factory-fabricated conductors of sizes, ratings, materials, and types indicated on the Drawings for each service.
Where not indicated, select to comply with project’s installation requirements and NEC standards. Comply with the
following:
1. UL 83.
2. Copper Conductor. Wire and cable stranded for all sizes.
3. Insulation type THHN/ THWN dual rated, 600 Volt for circuits from 115 to 600 Volts.
4. Use only 90 C insulated conductors based on 75 C ampacity tables of the NEC.
B. Aluminum Conductors: Use of aluminum conductors is not permitted.
2.02 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CIRCUITS
A. Class 1:
1. UL 83.
2. Stranded copper conductor.
3. Insulation type THHN, or THWN, 600 Volt for circuits from 115 to 600 Volts.
B. Class 2 and 3:
1. Copper conductor, 300 Volt insulation, rated 75 C in dry locations and 60 C in wet locations. Individual
conductors twisted together and covered with non-metallic jacket unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
2. UL listed for use in air handling ducts and hollow spaces used as ducts and plenums.
2.03 PLASTIC CABLE TIES
A. Teflon or nylon, locking type.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 19
Renton Technical College LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 19 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 WIRING AND CABLE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install electric conductors and cables as indicated on the Drawings, in compliance with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standards of Installation," and in accordance with
recognized industry practices.
B. Coordinate installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work for proper interface.
C. Pull cables by direct attachment to conductors or by use of basket weave pulling grip applied over cables.
Attachment to pulling device made through approved swivel connection. Non-metallic jacketed cables of small size
may be pulled directly by conductors by forming them into a loop to which pull wire can be attached. Remove
insulation from conductors before forming loop. Larger sizes of cable may be pulled by using basket weave pulling
grip, if pulling force does not exceed limits recommended by manufacturer. If pulling more than one cable, bind
them together with friction tape before applying grip. For long pulls requiring heavy pulling force, use pulling eyes
attached to conductors.
D. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendations for maximum allowable pulling tension, side wall pressure, and
minimum allowable bending radius. In all cases, pulling tension applied to conductors limited to 0.008 lbs. per
circular mil of conductor cross-section area.
E. Pull in cable from end having the sharpest bend (bend closest to reel). Keep pulling tension to minimum by liberal
use of lubricant, turning of reel, and slack feeding of cable into duct entrance. Employ not less than one man at reel
and one in pullhole during this operation.
F. For training of cables, minimum bend radius to inner surface of cable shall be 12 times cable diameter.
G. Where cable is pulled under tension over sheaves, conduit bends, or other curved surfaces, make minimum bend
radius 50 percent greater than specified above for training.
H. Apply wire and cable pulling compound recommended by specific cable manufacturer.
I. Seal cable ends unless splicing is done immediately.
J. Support cables in pullholes, concrete trenches, and similar locations by cable racks. Secure to rack insulators with
nylon cord or self-locking nylon cable ties. Place each cable on separate insulator.
K. Follow manufacturer's instructions for splicing and cable terminations.
3.05 WIRING METHODS, GENERAL
A. Install wiring in raceways unless shown on the Drawings or authorized by the A/E.
B. Install Wire After:
1. Interior of building is protected from weather.
2. Mechanical work likely to injure conductors is completed.
3. Conduits have been cleaned and moisture removed.
C. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panel boards.
D. Clean raceway system before installing conductors.
E. Use half-lapped synthetic tape if taping is utilized for insulation purposes.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 19
Renton Technical College LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 19 - 3
F. Provide conductor support devices as required by NEC in vertical conduit runs.
G. Torque conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.
H. Maintain minimum 12-inch clearance between open cabling and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and
heating appliances.
3.06 MINIMUM SIZES
A. Minimum No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
B. Minimum No. 14 AWG for control wiring.
3.07 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Support cable with bridle rings, drive rings, or Teflon cable ties. Support from conduit not acceptable.
B. Protect exposed cables where subject to damage.
C. Support cables above accessible ceilings. Do not rest on ceiling tiles.
D. Use suitable cable fitting and connectors.
3.08 WIRING SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
B. Use compression-set pressure connectors with insulating covers or screw-on pressure (wire nuts) for wire splices
and taps sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller.
C. Use compression-set pressure connectors with insulating covers for wire splices and taps sizes No. 8 AWG and
larger. Split bolt splices and connectors not acceptable.
D. Except where equipment is furnished with bolted or screw type lug, use compression set pressure connectors with
insulating covers for wire terminations.
E. Tape un-insulated portions of conductor and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of conductor insulation
value.
F. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
G. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
H. Leave minimum 8 inches of pigtail at outlet boxes for connection to fixtures and devices. Where wiring is continued
to other outlets, splice connection wire in a tap. In no case will continuity through double terminal of device be
allowed for either hot or neutral leg of circuit.
I. Insulate ends of spare conductors with electrical tape or wire nut.
J. Terminate control circuit conductors at terminal blocks only.
K. Utilize eye or forked tongue type compression set terminator for conductors No. 12 AWG and smaller when
termination is to a bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet.
L. Make below grade splices in manholes watertight with epoxy resin type splicing kits similar to Scotchcast.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Cables 600 Volts and Less: Comply with requirements in Section 26 08 00.
1. After installation and prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits.
Megger circuits of 100 Amp and greater rating. Correct malfunctions. Submit record of megohmmeter
readings to A/E.
2. Subsequent to wire and cable connections, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 26
Renton Technical College GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 26 - 1
SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes grounding requirements for underground metal water piping, gas piping, grounding
electrodes, rods, and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
2. IEEE 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground
System Part 2: Normal Measurements.
3. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
4. UL 467, Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
C. Comply with NEC and IEEE requirements as applicable to electrical grounding and ground fault protection systems.
D. Products UL listed and labeled.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the International Electrical
Testing Association and that is acceptable to the AHJ.
2. Ground system resistance tests performed by an independent testing agency.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each item and appurtenance.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of
grounding electrode conductor.
D. Test Reports:
1. Field test reports.
2. Submit completed copy of reports and include copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Sectional copper clad steel, conical points, threaded joints or couplings, 3/4-inch diameter by 10 foot
long sections. Ground rods minimum 20 feet long (2 sections) at each location. Copper-Weld or approved.
B. Ground Conductors: Soft drawn bare copper.
C. Ground Conductor in Non-Metallic Conduits: Bare, stranded, annealed, copper.
D. Ground Connections:
1. Conductor to Conductors, Conductor to Steel, and Conductor to Ground Rod: Exothermic-welded type
connectors. Cadweld, Thermoweld, or approved.
2. Conductor to Water Service, Conductor to Bars, and Conductor to Grounding Lugs of Electrical Equipment:
UL listed grounding terminal compression set on grounding conductor.
3. When making bolted connection to aluminum and galvanized structures, apply corrosion-inhibitor to contact
surfaces between cable, connector, and surface of structure. Penetrox A or approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 26
Renton Technical College GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 26 - 2
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
C. Preparation of Surfaces: Clean contacting surfaces of ground connections to bright metal before connecting.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 GROUNDING INSTALLATION
A. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest building steel.
B. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical
equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors,
underground metal water piping systems, and gas piping systems.
C. Install separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on
grounding lug, bus, and bushing and to intermediate metallic enclosures.
D. Connect grounding conductors to motors in accordance with NEC. Remove paint, dirt, and other surface coverings
at grounding conductor connection points so that good metal-to-metal contact is made.
E. Bare Grounding Conductors Below Grade:
1. Minimum 30 inches below top of soil.
2. Not in contact with gravel fill and concrete unless making transition from connections above slab to
conductors below grade.
3. Neatly trained around foundations and footings.
F. Ground shields of shielded power and control cable at each splice and termination as recommended by
manufacturer.
G. Ground metal sheathing and exposed vertical metal structural elements of building. Ground metal fences enclosing
electrical equipment. Bond metal equipment platforms which support electrical equipment to equipment ground.
Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations, receptacles, instrument
cabinets, raceways, and similar items carrying circuits to these devices.
H. Grounding Connections:
1. Provide full weld between coupling and ground rod at joint.
2. Connect grounding conductors to ground rods at upper end of rod with end of rod and connection point below
finished grade.
3. When making Thermite welds, wire brush or file point of contact to bare metal surface. Use Thermite welding
cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. After welds have been made and
cooled, brush slag from the weld area and clean joint. Use connectors of specified size for conductors and
ground rods. Notify A/E before backfilling ground connections.
I. System ground not to exceed maximum 5 ohms meggered resistance.
J. Size main grounding system per NEC. Provide conduit to protect ground wire from damage to an area 6 feet above
floor.
K. Install ground conductor in non-metallic conduits.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 08 00.
B. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
C. Testing agency, approved by the Owner and the A/E, shall perform ground resistance testing of system. Perform
test by means of fall-of-potential method. Maximum acceptable value 5 ohms.
1. Testing Instrument: Battery-powered or hand-cranked AC tester.
a. Indicates ground resistance in ohms from digital decade switches when unit’s self-contained meter
indicates null condition.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 26
Renton Technical College GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 26 - 3
b. Range: 0.01 to 9990 ohms in 4 overlapping ranges.
c. Null condition occurs when no current flows through potential electrodes.
d. Instrument accuracy: Plus 2 percent or greater.
2. Fall-of-Potential Test:
a. Connect instrument according to manufacturer’s instruction.
b. Place rod P2 at various locations in line between tested electrode and probe C2 and plot results on
graph (distance vs. resistance). Take sufficient readings to yield portion of plotted curve as being
constant (rate of resistance change becomes so small with respect to distance as to be insignificant).
3. Conduct 2 separate tests on opposite sides of grounding grid.
4. Report failure to obtain specified ground resistance to the A/E.
D. Include field test reports of grounding system in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 29
Renton Technical College HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 05 29 - 1
SECTION 26 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes conduit and equipment supports, fastening hardware, and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Sections 26 0500, and 26 0548 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each item and appurtenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. General: Built-up framing for electrical raceway and equipment supporting systems, including but not limited to
channel, rod, clamps, and hardware. Comply with requirements in Section 24 05 48 for seismic restraints. Unless
design is shown on the Drawings, size for 400 percent of calculated load.
1. Channel: 12 gage galvanized formed metal with or without pre-drilled holes, epoxy coated. Cooper B-Line
Dura Green, Unistrut, Powerstrut, or approved.
2. Beam Clamps, in Pairs, at each Supporting (Structural) Beam: B-line B441-22 and B441-22A; Superstrut U-
501 and U-502; Unistrut P2785, P2786, and P1379S, or approved. Submit other manufacturers for approval
with evidence proving clamp complies with IBC and ASCE 7-05 for seismic requirements. Submitted proof
can consist of letter signed and stamped by a professional engineer licensed in engineering in the state in
which the Work is performed.
3. Beam Clamps for Use with Rods: B-Line B751-J4, B751-J6, B751-J9, and B751-J12; Superstrut U-569;
Unistrut P2824-6, P2824-9, and P2824-12, or approved. Submit other manufacturers for approval with
evidence proving clamp complies with seismic requirements. Submitted proof can consist of letter signed and
stamped by a professional engineer licensed in engineering in the state in which the Work is performed.
4. Fittings for Attaching Channel-to-Channel for Built-Up Framing: Unistrut P6028, P6033, P6069, P6290,
P6291, P6326, P6331, P6332, P6346, P6358A, P6359, P6381, P6382, P6726A, P6917, P6962, or approved.
5. Connectors for Bracing: Unistrut P6186, P7097, P7098, P7100, P7101, P7108, P7109, P7110, P6546, or
approved.
6. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, attach connectors to vertical framing members with 2 bolts.
B. Hardware, including Nuts (Locking Type), Bolts, and Set Screws: Corrosion resistant, designed for intended use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 SUPPORTING DEVICES INSTALLATION
A. Install diagonal bracing for trapeze support systems at 2 right angle planes to brace against:
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 29
Renton Technical College HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 05 29 - 2
1. Horizontal and torsional movement lateral seismic forces.
2. Vertical (uplift) movement caused by vertical seismic forces.
3. Horizontal distortions in conduit system caused by wire pulling.
B. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors or
beam clamps. Spring steel clips and clamps not acceptable.
C. Install toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, and gypsum board partitions and walls. Install
expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls, self-drilling anchors, and expansion anchors on concrete
surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 48 for seismic anchors.
D. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
E. Powder actuated fasteners not acceptable.
F. Drilling and welding to structural steel members not acceptable except as indicated on the Drawings.
G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use
hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under nuts.
H. Free Standing Electrical Equipment: Bolt to concrete base with leveling channels. Comply with requirements in
Section 26 05 00 for concrete base and Section 26 05 48 for seismic restraints.
I. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.
J. Transformer Support: Comply with requirements in Section 26 22 00.
K. Lighting Fixture Supports: Comply with requirements in Section 26 51 00.
L. Conduit:
1. Perforated pipe straps, ceiling support wires, fixture support wire, and wires installed primarily to support
single runs of conduit not acceptable.
2. Install trapeze support systems for 2 or more parallel runs of conduit with 25 percent space (6 inches
minimum) for future conduit runs.
3. Welding conduit and conduit fittings to structure not acceptable.
4. Space conduit so that conduit fittings are accessible to accommodate pulling or splicing.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 32
Renton Technical College OUTLET BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 32 - 1
SECTION 26 05 32 – OUTLET BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes outlet, junction, and pull boxes and associated appurtenances required to enclose
devices, permit pulling conductors, and for wire splices and branches.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
3. UL 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of outlet box and appurtenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES FOR INTERIOR WIRING
A. General: Outlet and pull boxes pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where applicable, minimum 4-inch size.
B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same manufacturer and to match raceway. Boxes shall accommodate standard
devices and device plates.
C. Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete and mounting in masonry walls of type specifically designed
for that purpose.
D. Ceiling Outlet Boxes: Galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1-1/2 inches deep (without fixture stud) and 2-1/8 inch deep
(with fixture stud).
E. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 12 Inches in any Dimension: Include hinged enclosure.
2.02 OUTLET BOXES FOR EXTERIOR WIRING
A. General: Weather resistant and rain tight, with appropriate covers, gaskets, and screws.
B. Above Grade: Outlet and junction boxes cast or malleable iron or cast of corrosion resistant alloy compatible with
raceway to which they are connected. Pull boxes fabricated of hot dipped galvanized heavy gage steel. Boxes with
gasketed covers.
C. Below Grade: Where exposed to earth, boxes (handholes) constructed of precast concrete with size, configuration,
cover, grates and reinforcing as required by particular installation. Utility Vault Co. or approved.
2.03 OUTLET BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES
A. Outlet Boxes Containing Emergency and Normal Devices: Permitted only with steel barriers manufactured
especially for purpose of dividing outlet box into 2 completely separate compartments.
B. Outlet Boxes Containing Multiple Devices and Wiring Rated over 150 Volts to Ground and Over 300 Volts between
Conductors: Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for purpose of dividing outlet box into
separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 32
Renton Technical College OUTLET BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 32 - 2
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 COORDINATION OF OUTLET BOX LOCATIONS
A. Locate as shown on the Drawings and as required to facilitate pulling. Limit number of bends per NEC.
B. Electrical box locations shown on the Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes
and outlets before roughing in.
C. Locate outlet boxes to allow access. If inaccessible, furnish, arrange, and pay for installation of access doors.
D. Coordinate Work of this section with the Work of other sections and trades to avoid conflicts. Check and verify door
swings and locations of built-in cabinets, plumbing, heating, and ventilating equipment.
E. Install outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished under this or other divisions of
the specifications. Make final connections thereto. Outlet boxes required if equipment is furnished with pigtail for
external connection, does not have space to accommodate branch circuit wiring, or requires wire with insulation
rating different from branch circuit wiring. Review equipment Shop Drawings for required outlet locations.
F. Where more than one outlet box is shown on the Drawings and indicated to be at same elevation or one above the
other, align them exactly on center lines horizontally or vertically. Relocate outlet boxes which are not so installed
(including lighting, receptacle, power, signal, and temperature control outlets) at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features, or where outlet boxes are
centered between such features, such as between door jamb and cabinet, make these outlet box locations exact.
Relocate outlet boxes which are not centered.
H. Flush mount boxes with front edge of box or plaster ring even with finished surface of wall and ceiling, except those
mounted above accessible ceilings and where surface mounting is permitted.
I. Locate to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.
J. Route conduit from switch and receptacle boxes in walls vertically to space above ceiling. Install junction box before
horizontal run.
K. Offset outlet boxes minimum of one stud horizontal separation between flush boxes mounted on opposite sides of
acoustic rated common wall.
L. Install outlet boxes with minimum 6-inch horizontal separation between closest edges of flush boxes mounted on
opposite sides of common wall.
M. Ceiling Locations: Locate outlet either at corner joint or in center of a panel, whichever is closer to normal spacing.
Locate outlet boxes in same room in same panel locations.
N. Conceal outlet boxes for electric water coolers behind cooler unit housing.
3.05 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A. Anchor boxes so they will not shift or rock when devices are operated (including insertion and removal of cord caps).
B. Firmly anchor flush outlet boxes directly or with concealed bracing to studs and joists.
C. Close unused openings.
D. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast outlet boxes that are connected to 2 rigid metal conduits,
both supported within 12 inches of outlet box.
E. Use multiple-gang outlet boxes where 2 or more devices are mounted together. Do not use sectional boxes.
F. Install blank covers or plates over outlet boxes that do not contain devices.
G. In inaccessible ceiling areas, install outlet and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaire to be accessible
through luminaire ceiling openings.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 32
Renton Technical College OUTLET BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 32 - 3
H. Install recessed outlet boxes in finished areas. Secure outlet boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately
positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall
and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.
I. Install outlet boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
J. Seal conduit boxes, telephone boxes, and similar items airtight with acoustical caulk where located in acoustical
rated walls that are not fire rated.
K. Install outlet boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to
achieve neat openings for outlet boxes. Use outlet boxes with sufficient depth to permit conduit hubs to be located
in masonry void space.
L. Install pull boxes to be accessible after completion of building construction.
3.06 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK, AND CASEWORK
A. Install as shown on the Drawings. Furnish templates to other trades for drilling and cutting to ensure accurate
location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as verified with the A/E. Install wiring, devices, plates, and
connections required by said fixtures.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 33
Renton Technical College RACEWAY SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33 – RACEWAY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes conduit, electrical metallic tubing, wireway, surface metal raceway, and associated
appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. UL 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit.
2. UL 5, Standard for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.
3. UL 6, Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit.
4. UL 360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
5. UL 514B, Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.
6. UL 651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
7. UL 651A, Standard for Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit.
8. UL 797, Standard for Metallic Tubing – Steel.
9. UL 870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.
10. UL 1242, Standard for Intermediate Metal Conduit – Steel.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and installation of electrical
power connections.
D. Comply with applicable NEMA standards and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology herein. Comply
with NEC for workmanship and installation requirements of raceway systems.
E. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes specified and whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 1 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of raceway system and appurtenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 6, hot dip galvanized.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: UL 514B, threaded galvanized.
2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 1242, hot dip galvanized.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: UL 514B, threaded galvanized.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 797, hot dip galvanized.
B. Fittings: UL 514B, galvanized steel, insulated throat, raintight compression ring type through 1-1/4 inch, set screw
type for 1-1/2 inch and larger. Drive-on type and cast fittings not acceptable.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 1, galvanized. UL listed for grounding as available. Aluminum and flexible
metallic tubing not acceptable.
B. Fittings: Insulated throat, UL 514B, galvanized steel, UL listed for grounding as available.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 33
Renton Technical College RACEWAY SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 05 33 - 2
2.05 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Galvanized with PVC weatherproof cover, UL 360 listed for grounding as available.
B. Fittings: Insulated throat, UL 514B, galvanized steel, UL listed for grounding as available.
2.06 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT
A. PVC Conduit: Schedule 40, UL 651, rigid type unless noted otherwise. UL 651A Type A permitted for underground
concrete duct banks.
B. Fittings: UL 651 and UL 651A.
1. For electric (power) duct, 90-degree elbows factory manufactured PVC coated rigid steel with minimum 48-
inch radius.
2. For telephone and cable television duct, 90-degree elbows factory manufactured PVC coated rigid steel with
minimum 60-inch radius.
2.07 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. UL 5, sheet metal channel with fitted cover. Type and size as shown on the Drawings.
B. Finish: Enamel. Field paint to match wall color.
C. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Designed for use with raceway systems.
D. All raceway and fittings to be supplied by one manufacturer.
E. Manufacturers: Wiremold or approved.
2.08 CONDUIT BODIES
A. Conduit bodies cast malleable iron, zinc or cadmium plated with threaded connections. Covers gasketed, blank
steel, or cast malleable iron, zinc or cadmium plated, and of same manufacturer as conduit body. Where conduit
bodies are used as junction or splice boxes, comply with NEC.
2.09 WIREWAY AND AUXILIARY GUTTER
A. UL 870, lay-in type, with hinged cover but without knockouts.
B. Size: As shown on the Drawings, 4 by 4 inch minimum.
C. Finish: Rust-inhibiting primer coat with manufacturer’s standard enamel finish.
2.10 EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized allowing 4 inches (plus or minus 2 inches) conduit movement. OZ/Gedney Type
AX Series or approved.
2.11 SEALING FITTINGS
A. Wall Sealing Fittings: At each wall sealing fitting, include conduit seal fitting, OZ/Gedney FSK Series, Crouse Hinds
EYS Series, or approved.
B. Raceway Stubups and Stubouts: Conduit seals together with wall sealing fittings. OZ/Gedney CSB Series or
approved.
C. For Exterior Wall Penetrations below Grade: Include sealing bushing at interior end of penetrating raceway. Only
threaded fittings are permitted in entering raceways ahead of sealing bushing. OZ/Gedney Type CSB or approved.
2.12 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable iron. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29.
2.13 FIRE RATED SEALING COMPOUND
A. Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam or approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 33
Renton Technical College RACEWAY SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 05 33 - 3
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 RACEWAY SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT
A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, size conduit for conductor type installed. Minimum size 3/4 inch.
B. Install conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance in unfinished spaces. Install a minimum of 9’-6”
above finished floor in spaces unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
C. Install conduit concealed in walls, below floors, and above ceiling in spaces, except conduit may be exposed in
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and similar unfinished spaces.
D. Horizontal conduit installation is not allowed in floor slab unless specifically noted on electrical and structural
Contract Drawings.
E. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to building planes.
F. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and
heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, heating and hot water pipes, and heating appliances.
G. Brace conduit or conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire-pulling operations.
H. Where conduit is run in parallel, group on formed channel supports. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29.
I. Do not fasten or support with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove temporary conduit supports used during
construction before conductors are pulled.
J. Do not cut structural members for passage of raceway.
3.05 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter. Deburr cut ends.
B. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and tighten securely.
C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet
locations.
D. Do not use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction unless shown on the Drawings.
E. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in 2-inch conduit and larger.
F. Provide plastic bushings on conduit stubs used for transition from conduit to open cable runs.
G. During construction, use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
H. Distance Between Supports:
1. Threaded Rigid Metal Raceways: Maximum 8-foot centers and within 18 inches of each outlet, junction box,
and bend.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Maximum 8-foot centers at each bend and within 12 inches of each outlet, junction
box, and coupling.
3. Surface Metal Raceway, Auxiliary Gutter, and Wireway: Maximum 5-foot centers or in accordance with
manufacturer’s instruction, whichever is less, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
I. Install nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except sleeves
and nipples. Identify with tags at each end origin and destination of each empty conduit.
J. Route conduit through roof inside openings for ductwork where possible. Otherwise, install through roof jack and
seal weather tight.
K. Install no more than equivalent or four 90-degree bends between boxes.
L. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, install junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 33
Renton Technical College RACEWAY SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 05 33 - 4
M. Raceway Installation below Slab on Grade and underground:
1. Install marker tape over underground raceway as specified in Section 26 05 53.
2. Arrange and slope raceway entering building to drain away from building.
3. Install insulated grounding bushings at conduits stubbed up or out from underground unless capped for future
(spare).
4. Wipe PVC conduit clean and dry before jointing. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area to be inserted
into fitting. Let joint cure for minimum 20 minutes.
5. Install conduit that stub up through floor at such depth that exposed conduit is vertical and no curved section
of elbow is visible.
N. Sealing of Conduit Penetrations:
1. Exterior Wall Surfaces above Grade: Seal around penetrations with caulking approved by the A/E. For
concrete construction above ground level, cast conduit in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with mixture of
equal parts of sand and cement.
2. Exterior Wall Surfaces below Grade: Cast conduit into wall (and floor) or use manufactured seal assembly
cast in place.
3. Roofs: Install mopped and flashing roof jack and where conduit penetrates roof membrane.
4. Fire Rated Construction: Seal penetrations with fire rated sealing compound to maintain fire rating of
construction penetrated.
O. Sealing of Raceways: Seal interior of raceways that pass-through building roof and through outside walls of
building, above or below grade. Seal on end inside building. Use raceway sealing fittings manufactured for purpose
sealed with non-hardening, compound-type mastic, specially designed for such service. Pack around wires in
raceways.
P. Do not install conduit on exterior surface of building, except as shown on the Drawings and as approved by the A/E.
Q. Where flexible metal or liquid tight flexible metal conduit is installed, install bonding conductor to ensure electrical
continuity of raceway. Route bonding jumper inside conduit and terminate at grounding bushing or grounding
locknut installed on inside of junction boxes at each side of flexible section. In instances where this method is not
feasible (such as when cast boxes with hubs are used or where required by the NEC, route bonding jumper on
outside of flexible conduit and terminate in accordance with methods acceptable to the AHJ.
R. Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts unless approved by the A/E. Install sleeves for raceway installation.
S. Install 6 spare 3/4-inch conduits (capped) from each recessed/flush mounted branch panelboard into ceiling space
or mechanical platform if one exists. Extend conduits required distance necessary to reach accessible ceiling space.
T. In finished areas with exposed structure, subject to the approval of the A/E, raceways may be installed exposed.
Install raceways as high as possible, tight to the ceiling deck, and neatly arranged. Submit shop drawing indicating
routing of proposed surface raceways and boxes in finished areas.
U. At locations above first floor slab, conduit runs are not permitted within concrete slab. Route conduits in walls,
above ceiling, and below floor. Install additional knockouts in floor boxes to serve them from below.
3.06 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Use flat-head screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
B. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
C. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components for continuous grounding path.
D. Fastener Option: Use manufacturer’s standard clips and straps for installed purpose.
3.07 AUXILIARY GUTTER INSTALLATION
A. Bolt auxiliary gutter to steel channels fastened to wall or in self-supporting structure. Install level.
B. Gasket each joint in oil-tight gutter.
C. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only.
3.08 UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK INSTALLATION
A. Install top of duct bank at depth shown on the Drawings or minimum 24 inches below finished grade, whichever
depth is deeper.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 33
Renton Technical College RACEWAY SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 05 33 - 5
B. Install conduit with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet.
C. Terminate conduit in end bell at manhole entries.
D. Stagger conduit joints in concrete encasement minimum 6 inches.
E. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 foot on center. Band conduit together with suitable
banding devices. Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during concrete placement.
F. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of duct bank.
G. Do not use union-type fittings without approval of the A/E.
H. Construction:
1. When termination of duct is not detailed on the Drawings, extend duct 1’-0” beyond concrete encasement and
end cap.
2. Plug and cap ends of ducts to protect from damage during construction and at end of each day’s concrete
pour. Protect ends of conduits not used for long periods from dirt and rodents with wooden or manufactured
plugs. Non-setting mastic may be used on plug to adhere to conduit end. Drill 1/4-inch hole in lower portion
of plug for drainage of conduit.
3. Swab ducts immediately upon completion of concrete pour. After cement has set, but before backfilling, pull
mandrel having diameter equal to nominal conduit inside diameter, minus 1/2 inch, and not less than 12
inches long, through each duct. Mandrel lead-covered or painted white to indicate protrusion inside conduit
which might injure cable sheath. Attach wire to rear end of swab mandrel to replace wire being pulled out.
When not in use, fasten this wire securely at both ends of duct.
I. Observation: Ducts will be reviewed by the Owner’s Representative before pouring concrete. The Owner’s
Representative will review for backfill compaction, drainage slope, spacers, floatation ties, conduit condition, and
joints. Concrete shall not be poured until the observation is complete.
3.09 RACEWAY SCHEDULE
A. Rigid Metal Conduit:
1. Acceptable in all locations except as modified in this section.
2. Where in contact with earth or concrete, install protective coating consisting of spirally wrapped 20 mil PVC
tape with 1/2-inch minimum overlap – 3M Scotchrap Tape 51 or approved - or utilize PVC Coated Rigid Metal
Conduit. Completely wrap and tape field joints.
3. Required for exposed raceways in areas subject to physical damage.
B. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit:
1. Required in corrosive environments or where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit:
1. May be used in lieu of rigid metal conduit unless otherwise prohibited by code or indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
2. Not acceptable for circuits over 600 Volts.
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing:
1. Acceptable for dry interior locations where not exposed to moisture or physical damage.
2. Not acceptable for circuits over 600 Volts.
E. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit:
1. Acceptable underground with minimum 24 inches of cover.
2. Acceptable below concrete slab on grade installed a minimum of 2 inches below bottom of slab.
3. Acceptable within masonry walls subject to approval by structural engineer.
4. Not acceptable for raceways extending through concrete; utilize Rigid Metal Conduit.
5. Not acceptable for bends 45 degrees and greater unless concrete encased; utilize Rigid Metal Conduit as
specified herein or PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit. Field bends not acceptable.
6. Concrete encased were indicated on Contract Drawings or where required by Code or Utility.
F. Flexible Steel Conduit:
1. For connections to recessed light fixtures and devices installed in suspended ceilings, maximum six-foot
length.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 33
Renton Technical College RACEWAY SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 05 33 - 6
2. For connections to motors, transformers and other equipment subject to vibration. Minimum of three foot and
maximum of six-foot length with 90-degree loop.
G. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.
1. For pump motors and equipment subject to vibration in damp and wet locations, in areas subject to being
washed down, and for machinery where cutting oil is used. Minimum of three foot and maximum of six-foot
length with 90-degree loop.
H. Surface Metal and Multi-Outlet Raceway: Install where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
I. Auxiliary Gutters and Wireways: Install where indicated on the Contract Drawings and as required in unfinished
spaces. Elsewhere as approved by the A/E.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 48
Renton Technical College VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 26 05 48 - 1
SECTION 26 05 48 – VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes isolation pads, spring isolators, restrained spring isolators, restraint cables, hanger rod
stiffeners, anchorage bushings and washers, and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards: NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code
- Steel."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation and seismic restraint
device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of
seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in
tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to the AHJ.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.
3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraint details indicate to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic
forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors.
b. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.
3. Field fabricated supports.
4. Seismic Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of
combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to restrained items and
to structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their
strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to structure during seismic events.
Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By agency acceptable to AHJ, showing maximum ratings
of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
D. Welding certificates.
E. Test Reports:
1. Field test reports.
2. Submit completed copy of reports and include copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 48
Renton Technical College VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 26 05 48 - 2
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: A single supplier shall furnish isolation mounts, pads, seismic restraints, sway braces, related hardware,
and fabricate isolation bases for the project unless otherwise specified.
B. Responsibility: This supplier shall be responsible for selection and installation supervision of vibration isolators.
Prepare engineering drawings and details and submit to the A/E. Perform installation supervision and provide
adjustment instructions.
C. Seismic Restraints:
1. Design and select restraint devices for ducts, pipes, and equipment to meet seismic requirements defined in
IBC and ASCE 7-05. Prepare calculations based on coefficients included on the structural drawings. Refer to
the structural drawings for allowable methods and loads.
2. Shop Drawings, details, and calculations shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer licensed in
engineering in the state in which the Work is performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, California Dynamics Corporation, Kinetics Noise Control, Mason Industries, Vibro-
Acoustics, Vibration Mountings & Controls, or approved.
B. Isolation Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded
with nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported
equipment.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 inch thick, rubber isolator pad attached
to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level
equipment.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed.
Factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch-thick neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate
underside. Adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and AHJ.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of spring at rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
2.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, California Dynamics Corporation, Cooper B-Line, Hilti, Mason Industries, TOLCO,
Unistrut, or approved.
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements as
defined in reports by an agency acceptable to AHJ.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components minimum 4
times maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with
thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service. Include minimum 2 clamping bolts for
cable engagement.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
E. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and
matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 48
Renton Technical College VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 26 05 48 - 3
F. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves
designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices.
G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene with a flat washer
face.
H. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications
and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested
according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of 8 times diameter.
I. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin
and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Zinc-coated steel for interior applications and
stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested
according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for
application by an agency acceptable to the AHJ.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to
seismic forces. Welding stiffeners to rods not acceptable.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic Restraint Assemblies: Select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to
carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.05 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.
2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and
adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3. Install seismic restraint devices using methods approved by agency acceptable to AHJ providing required
submittals for component.
B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where
equipment or equipment mounting channels are attached to wall.
C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated on the Drawings, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, and at concrete members.
D. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not
damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the A/E if reinforcing steel or
other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, and grout has achieved full design strength.
3. Mechanical Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Install sleeve anchors with
sleeve fully engaged in structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 48
Renton Technical College VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 26 05 48 - 4
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive.
Place adhesive in holes proceeding from bottom of hole and progressing toward surface in such a manner as
to avoid introduction of air pockets in adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.
3.06 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross
seismic joints, where adjacent sections and branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they
terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting
them as they approach equipment.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Obtain the A/E’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Install temporary load-spreading
members.
2. Test at least 4 of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by the A/E.
3. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
4. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
5. Measure isolator deflection.
6. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
7. If a device fails test, modify installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units, provide new, and retest as specified above.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Include copy of reports in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment
installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 53
Renton Technical College IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 53 - 1
SECTION 26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes nameplates, wire and cable markers, conduit color coding, buried duct marking tape,
and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards: NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Nameplate schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIAL
A. Nameplates:
1. Engraved three-layer laminated plastic.
a. Normal Power: White letters on black background.
b. Emergency Power: White letters on orange background.
2. Panelboards and Switchboards: 1/2-inch-high letters to identify equipment designation. 1/4-inch-high letters
to identify voltage rating and source.
3. Enclosed Circuit Breakers, Disconnect Switches, Motor Starters: 1/4-inch-high letters to identify load served
and source.
4. Transformers: 1/2-inch-high letters to identify equipment designation. 1/4-inch-high letters to identify primary
and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.
5. Automatic Transfer Switches: 1/2-inch-high white letters to identify equipment designation, voltage rating,
normal source, standby source and load served and location.
6. Emergency Power Boxes and Enclosures larger than six inches by six inches. 1/2-inch-high letters to identify
equipment and source designation.
B. All outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes for emergency system devices and circuits shall be orange in color,
both inside and outside.
C. All outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes for fire alarm system devices and conductors shall be red in color,
both inside and outside.
D. Permanent felt marker for junction and pull box circuit notation.
1. Normal Power: Black letters.
E. Wire and Cable Markers:
1. Split sleeve or tubing type. Vinyl impregnated cloth, vinyl, and mylar self-adhesive types not acceptable.
2. Color code wire in accordance with the coding shown in Decal Detail below. Conductors of power systems in
this building (plant) are identified as follows:
Conductor 208Y/120 Volt 480/277 Volt
A Phase (Left Bus In Panel): Black Brown
B Phase (Center Bus In Panel): Red Orange
C Phase (Right Bus In Panel): Blue Yellow
Neutral: White Gray
Equipment Ground: Green Green
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 53
Renton Technical College IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 53 - 2
3. Color Code 208Y/120V isolated/insulated ground circuits as follows:
Conductor Color
Phase A Black with yellow stripe
Phase B Red with yellow stripe
Phase C Blue with yellow stripe
Neutral-Phase A White with black stripe
Neutral-Phase B White with red stripe
Neutral-Phase C White with blue stripe
Isolated Ground Green with yellow stripe
Equipment Ground Green
F. Phase Identification: Vinyl colored electrical tape.
G. Buried Duct Marking Tape:
1. Electrical (Power) Ducts: Six-inch-wide red tape with words "CAUTION - ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW".
2. Telephone Ducts: Six-inch-wide orange tape with the words "CAUTION- TELEPHONE LINE BURIED
BELOW".
3. Cable Television Ducts: Six-inch-wide orange tape with words "CAUTION - CABLE TV LINE BURIED
BELOW".
H. Electrical Hazard Marking Tape: Black and yellow striped vinyl 2” wide hazard tape, Identi-Tape #VH2BKY or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. Description: Install, apply, erect, and perform work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, more
stringent requirements govern.
B. Nameplates:
1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
2. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
3. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets. Adhesives not acceptable.
C. Wire Identification:
1. Install wire markers on conductors in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet, and junction boxes, and at load
connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits and with control wire
number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings
for control wiring.
2. Install solid-colored jackets for wire sizes smaller than number 8 AWG. Wire sizes larger than number 10
AWG may be taped at both ends and at pull and junction boxes with appropriate colored tape. Color coding
tape to completely encircle conductor at least 3 inches wide.
D. Decals: Install decal behind circuit breaker door where it can be easily seen when circuits are added.
E. Felt Marker Identification: Apply on front of cover in non-finished areas, such as mechanical/electrical rooms, above
ceilings, and similar locations, and on back of cover in finished areas.
F. Provide black and yellow striped vinyl 2” wide hazard tape on floor and stencil “Electrical Hazard-Keep Clear” on
floor, spaced as to not exceed 4 feet on center to identify code required clearance in front of electrical equipment
including switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, transfer switches, etc. in unfinished
spaces such as electrical and mechanical rooms.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 05 53
Renton Technical College IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 05 53 - 3
G. Conduit Color Coding: Identify conduits containing medium-voltage cable (greater than 600 Volt) by painting
exposed conduits with Orange Safety (FSC-12246) paint. Stencil legend "HIGH VOLTAGE" in Gloss Black (FSC-
17038) paint at intervals not exceeding 15 feet at visible locations.
3.04 COMMISSIONING
A. The equipment and systems referenced in this section are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General
Commissioning Requirements and Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems. The contractor has
specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation.
Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 27 26
Renton Technical College WIRING DEVICES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 27 26 - 1
SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes wall switches, receptacles, device plates, box covers, and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Federal Specification W-C-596, Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
2. Federal Specification W-S-896, Switch, Toggle.
3. NEMA WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
4. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
5. UL 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of wiring device and appurtenance.
C. Provide plate engraving schedule.
D. Test Reports:
1. Field test reports.
2. Submit completed copy of reports and include copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Leviton, Bryant Electric, General Electric, Hubbell, Pass and Seymour, or approved. Leviton model
numbers are listed.
B. Finish: Ivory.
C. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits: NEMA WD 1. General use snap switch with ivory colored toggle handle rated 20
Amps and 120/277 Volts AC. Switch with back and side wired screw type terminals. Units specification grade.
1. Single-Pole Toggle Switch: Leviton Model 1221-2.
2. Double-Pole Toggle Switch: Leviton Model 1222-2.
3. Three-Way Toggle Switch: Leviton Model 1223-2.
4. Four-Way Toggle Switch: Leviton Model 1224-2.
D. Key Type Switches: Rating same as for wall switches:
1. Single-Pole Key Switch: Hubbell straight blade.
2. Double-Pole Key Switch: Hubbell straight blade.
3. Three-Way Key Switch: Hubbell straight blade.
4. Four-Way Key Switch: Hubbell straight blade.
E. Pilot Light Type: Red pilot handle. Handle lighted when switch is ON. Rating same as for wall switches. Leviton
Model 1221-PLR (120V)/1221-7PR (277V).
F. Momentary Contact Line Voltage Switches: Single pole, double throw, 3-wire, normally open. Rating same as for
wall switches. Leviton Model 1257.
G. Weatherproof: Switches mounted in a cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof device plate.
2.02 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL
A. Manufacturer: General Electric, Square-D, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, or approved.
1. Relays: General Electric Type RR-7.
2. Switches: General Electric Type RTS-5.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 27 26
Renton Technical College WIRING DEVICES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 27 26 - 2
3. Transformers: General Electric Type RT1 and RT2.
4. Rectifiers: General Electric Type RA16.
5. Device Plates: As specified in Article “Device Plates.”
6. Finish: Ivory.
B. Wire: Copper conductor for low voltage control purpose furnished by supplier of low voltage relays and switches.
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers: Leviton, Bryant Electric, Crouse Hinds, General Electric, Hubbell, Pass and Seymour, or approved.
Leviton model numbers are listed.
B. Finish: Ivory.
C. Convenience and Straight-Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1. Units specification grade.
1. Provide for 10 extra duplex receptacles with 50' of 3/4" conduit and 2 #12 AWG CU & 1#12 G. for each.
D. Convenience Receptacle Configuration:
1. Duplex Receptacle: (20A-125V NEMA 5-20R), straight blade grounding type. Leviton Model 5362.
2. Single Receptacle: Leviton Model 5361.
3. Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacles: Leviton Model 5362-IG.
E. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles mounted in a cast steel box with gasketed, weatherproof device plate.
Leviton W7899-TRW.
F. Specific Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1. Type as indicated on the Drawings, with black plastic face.
G. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter. Units feed-through
type for downstream device protection. Leviton Model N7899-I.
1. Provide for 10 extra GFCI duplex receptacles with 50' of 3/4" conduit and 2 #12 AWG CU & 1#12 G. for each.
H. Tamper Resistant Receptacles:
1. Leviton Model 5362-SG.
I. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles:
1. Leviton Model X7899-I
2.04 DEVICE PLATES
A. Manufacturers: Bryant Electric, Hubbell, Leviton, Pass and Seymour, or approved. Bryant Electric and Leviton
model numbers are listed.
B. Plates in Finished Areas: Type 302 non-magnetic stainless steel except as noted below:
1. Wall plates for isolated ground receptacles to be with 1/4 inch specially engraved black letters “COMPUTER
ONLY”.
2. Wall plates for emergency receptacles with 1/4-inch red letters “EMERGENCY”. Leviton 84003-E40.
3. Wall plates for dedicated receptacles with 1/4 inch specially engraved black letters “DEDICATED”.
4. Wall plates for receptacles protected by a GFCI circuit breaker or feed through GFCI receptacle with 1/4-inch
black letters “GFCI PROTECTED”. Bryant Electric S601 GFP.
5. Wall plates for receptacles other than NEMA 5-20R with 1/4 inch specially engraved black letters which show
ampere rating, voltage, and phase.
C. Plates on Surface Mounted Boxes: Sized to fit box without extending over sides of box.
D. Cast Metal Plates: Cast metal box. Steel plates with steel boxes and copper-free aluminum with aluminum boxes.
Stainless steel screws.
E. Raised Sheet Steel Plates: 1/2-inch-high zinc or cad-plated covers with surface mounted sheet steel boxes.
F. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. Leviton M5979-GY.
G. Finish of Attachment Screws: Match that of its respective device plate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 27 26
Renton Technical College WIRING DEVICES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 27 26 - 3
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 WIRING DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices in clean electrical boxes, free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris.
B. Install jumbo size plates for outlets in masonry walls.
C. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and
on surface mounted outlets.
D. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
E. Fasten each device to outlet box at wall surface to bring receptacle flush with plate or for switch handle the proper
distance through plate.
3.05 ORIENTATION
A. Install switches vertical with handle operating vertically, up position "ON". Install center at 44 inches above finished
floor unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Install receptacles vertical with ground slot down centered at 18 inches above finished floor and 6 inches above
counters.
C. Install exterior receptacles horizontal at 18 inches above finished grade.
3.06 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING
A. Install bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws connecting frame to
box not acceptable for grounding.
3.07 HANDICAPPED ACCESS
A. Comply with requirements of Washington State Handicapped Access Code.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 08 00. Include copy of field test reports in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
B. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and polarity connections. After energizing
circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 28 13
Renton Technical College OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 28 13 - 1
SECTION 26 28 13 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes overcurrent protective devices for operation at 600 Volts and below, including circuit
breakers and fuses as individual components in separate enclosures and for installation as integral components of
switchboards and panelboards and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards: NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. Comply with NEMA and ANSI standards as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent protective
devices.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on overcurrent protective devices, including catalog
cuts, time-current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of circuit breakers with spatial relationships to proximate equipment.
D. Test Reports:
1. Field test reports.
2. Submit completed copy of reports and include copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Fuses: For each type and rating, furnish additional fuses amounting to 1 unit for every 5 units installed, but not less
than 2 units of each size and type.
B. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Provide one, sized to house spare fuses provided under this contract plus 25% additional
space for future.
C. Electronic Trip Unit Test Set: Furnish one set, including associated software, capable of testing all circuit breakers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breaker manufacturer shall be same as panelboard and switchboard manufacturer when
installed therein.
B. Fusible Circuit Breakers: Bussmann Mfg. Co.
C. Fuses: Bussmann Mfg. Co. or Ferraz Shawmut. No substitutions. Fuses shall be by one manufacturer.
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General:
1. Fixed mounted molded case type with unless indicated otherwise.
2. overcenter, trip-free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive
handle indication.
3. Common trip for two and three pole Circuit breakers. Handles permitted on approval of samples.
4. Trip ratings imprinted on handle or visible through deadfront cover.
5. Constructed for mounting and operating in any physical position and calibrated for operation in ambient
temperature up to 40 C.
6. Mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated, to accommodate conductors specified.
Rated for 75 C conductors for 60 Amp and larger circuit breakers.
7. Amperage and Voltage as indicated.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 28 13
Renton Technical College OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 28 13 - 2
8. Short circuit rating: RMS interrupting rating as indicated. Minimum 10,000 AIC rating at 120, 208 and 240
Volts. Minimum 14,000 AIC rating at 277 and 480 Volts.
9. Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) circuit breakers: Equipped with integral Class B ground fault interrupter set to
trip on ground fault of thirty milliamps or greater. Adjustable settings shall not exceed 1200 amperes.
10. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) circuit breakers: Equipped with integral Class A ground fault circuit
interrupter set to trip on ground fault of six milliamps or greater.
11. Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) where indicated.
12. Switching rated for 120 Volt and 277 Volt lighting branch circuits.
13. HACR rating where serving air conditioning and refrigeration equipment.
14. Current limiting, utilizing non-fuse type current limiting, where indicated.
15. Tandem-mounted circuit breakers not acceptable.
16. Minimum Frame Size: To match trip rating, unless indicated otherwise.
17. Keyed Interlocks: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit breaker operation. Provide nameplates at each keyed
interlock indicating interlocked circuit breaker and sequence of operation.
18. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground fault trip unit for interlocking ground fault protection function.
B. Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Individually mounted fixed type.
2. Electronic trip unit.
C. Trip Units:
1. Thermal magnetic unless indicated otherwise. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for sizes 250 Amps and larger.
2. Electronic trip unit: where indicated, specified or required by Selective Coordination Study.
3. Electronic Trip Unit: Field-replaceable rating plug, RMS sensing Adjustable settings: Instantaneous trip; long
and short-time time adjustments; long and short-time pickup adjustments; where ground fault protection
indicated, ground fault pickup level, time delay and I2t response. Built-in test points for testing the long time,
short time, delay, instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the circuit breaker. Required for circuit
breakers:
a. Sized [400] Amps and larger on 480 Volt systems.
b. Sized [800] Amps and larger on systems 250 Volts and lower.
c. Sized [100] Amps and larger serving emergency and legally required standby systems and equipment.
d. Where indicated.
e. Where required by the Selective Coordination Study.
2.03 FUSES
A. General:
1. Fuses of type, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics of single manufacturer.
2. Fuses labeled UL Class L, UL Class R, current limiting, rated for up to 200,000 Amps.
B. Where fuses are shown on the Drawings feeding individual or groups of equipment items, comply with
manufacturer's recommendation for fusing. Adjust fuse size and type to comply with manufacturer's
recommendation.
C. Main Service, Feeder and Branch Circuit Fuses:
1. For fuse ratings over 600 Amps: UL Class L (KRP-C or A4BY).
2. For fuse ratings up to 600 Amps: UL Class J.
3. Feeder or branch circuit directly feeding motors, transformers, and other inductive load: UL RK5 time delay
(FRN-R, FRS-R or TR-R or TRS-R).
4. Other Branch Circuits: UL Class RK1, (KTN-R, KTS-R or A2K-R, A6K-R).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 28 13
Renton Technical College OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 28 13 - 3
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Install in panelboards, switchboards, and enclosures, in accordance with the manufacturer's recognized industry
practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards.
B. Adjust circuit breaker settings in accordance with the Selective Coordination Study report.
3.05 FUSES
A. Install fuses in switches, panelboards, switchboards, and enclosures. Install fuses so current rating is visible from
front when cover is open.
B. Do not install until equipment is ready to be energized.
C. Coordinate with equipment furnished by others for proper fuse type and size.
D. For motor and equipment circuits, fuse sizes shown on the Contract Drawings are for general guidance only. Size
fuses in accordance with fuse manufacturer’s recommendation for given motor nameplate ampere rating. Test
operation. If nuisance tripping occurs, increase fuse size and disconnect device (if necessary) for nuisance free
tripping. Adjust fuse size for ambient temperature, frequent starting and stopping of motor loads, and for loads with
long start times.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test circuit breakers as specified in Section 26 08 00.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 28 16
Renton Technical College DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 28 16 - 1
SECTION 26 28 16 – DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. UL 98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and maintenance data for each type of equipment and
appurtenance. Include equipment characteristics such as ratings, enclosure type, dimensions and weight.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Disconnect Switches and Enclosed Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer shall be same as panelboard and switchboard
manufacturer, unless prior approved.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Ratings: Voltage, Amperage and horsepower rating suitable for circuit and equipment controlled. Service entrance
rated where indicated or required.
B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted.
1. NEMA Type 1, in general.
2. NEMA Type 3R where exposed to moisture and where shown on the Drawings.
C. Accessories:
1. Padlockable in “OFF” position.
2. Labeled “ON”/”OFF” position.
3. Ground lug.
4. Neutral lug where applicable.
5. Other accessories as indicated.
D. Nameplates: Per Section 26 05 53.
2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. General: Heavy duty, UL 98, horsepower rated with external handle.
B. Interlock: Defeatable door interlock that prevent door from opening when operating handle is in “ON” position.
C. Fusible or non-fusible as indicated. Fuse rejection clips where Class R fuses are specified.
D. Quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Visible blades.
2.04 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breaker: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker per Section 26 28 13. One form “C” auxiliary contact activated
when circuit breaker open.
B. Short Circuit Interrupting Rating: Fully rated for available fault current indicated; 42,000 Amps symmetrical
minimum.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 28 16
Renton Technical College DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 26 28 16 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Comply with applicable requirements of
NEC, NEMA and NECA standards, and with recognized industry practice. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
B. Install where indicated on the Contract Drawings and where required. Mount independent of equipment served; do
not attach to equipment served.
C. Coordinate installation work with electrical raceway, wire, and cable work as necessary for proper interface. Comply
with requirements in Section 26 05 33.
D. Install within sight of equipment or controller served.
E. Where locations are not shown on Contract Drawings, locate on wall adjacent to equipment being served or on
formed steel channel frame at face of equipment. Coordinate location to maintain equipment clearances.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 08 00. Include copy of field test reports in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 51 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 51 00 - 1
SECTION 26 51 00 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: Work includes interior and exterior light fixtures, drivers, LED's and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
C. Comply with requirements in other specification sections for concrete for embedding poles, pole foundations, and
footings for exterior area lighting poles, standards, and foundations. Pole bases included in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards: NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. Comply with NEC and NEMA for installation and construction of lighting fixtures. Comply with NEC for recessed
incandescent lighting fixtures. Lighting fixtures UL listed and labeled.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and maintenance data for each type of lighting fixtures
and appurtenance. Submit product data for each lamp type and each ballast type, with a matrix indicating which
fixtures apply to submitted ballast and lamp type.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit dimensioned drawings of each type of lighting fixtures. Submit in booklet form with separate sheet for
each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" in alphabetical order with proposed fixture and appurtenance
clearly indicated on each sheet.
2. Submit support and hanging details for lighting fixtures weighing more than 56 pounds and pendant hung
lighting fixtures requiring support design approved by the AHJ.
D. Test Reports:
1. Field test reports.
2. Submit completed copy of reports and include copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Exit Signs: Furnish and install ten percent (but not less than one exit sign) of each type used on the project. For
each exit sign, include rough-in and fifty feet of branch circuit raceway and wiring connected to a local circuit.
Location of spare exit signs as required by authority having jurisdiction. Turn over any unused spare exit signs to
the Owner and obtain signed receipt.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal
conditions.
B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C. CRI: Color-rendering index.
D. Fixture: A complete lighting unit or exit sign. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute the light,
position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to the power supply.
E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G. Luminaire: Fixture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of fixture):
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 51 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 51 00 - 2
1. Luminaires: Refer to Light Fixture Schedule on Contract Drawings.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for lamp and ballast combinations.
2.02 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Components are formed and supported to prevent warping
and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating
conditions. Arrange to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other
pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in the operating position.
D. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass
except as indicated.
1. Plastic: Highly resistant to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation.
2. Lens Thickness: 0.156 inches minimum.
2.03 INTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES
A. General:
1. Light fixtures of sizes, types, and ratings indicated on the Drawings complete with, but not necessarily limited
to, housings, lamps, reflectors, starters, and wiring.
2. Label each fixture with manufacturer's name and catalog number.
3. Include positive latch mechanisms for enclosed fixtures. Spring tension clips not acceptable.
4. Include exterior fixtures with damp or wet location label as required by application.
B. LED's: Rated for utilization voltage.
C. Diffusers:
1. 100 percent virgin acrylic compound.
2. Minimum thickness 0.125 inches.
D. Support Requirements:
1. Include flexible ball joint hangers for pendant and stem hung fixtures at points of support.
2. Equip hooks used to hang fixtures with safety latches. Include supports, brackets, clips, screws, and
miscellaneous items for mounting fixtures.
3. Include locking catches, screws, safety chain, or safety cable for detachable fixture parts, luminous ceiling
accessories, louvers, diffusers, lenses, and reflectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions,
specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more
stringent requirements govern.
3.04 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with fixture
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NESC, NECA's "Standards of Installation",
NEMA standards, and recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.
B. Coordinate with other work as appropriate to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work.
Consult architectural reflected ceiling plan and interior elevations for location of lighting fixtures.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 51 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 26 51 00 - 3
C. Lighting Fixture Supports:
1. General: Comply with NEC as interpreted by AHJ or IBC, whichever is more stringent, for fixtures mounted in
suspended ceilings.
2. Seismic Restraints:
a. For Lighting Fixtures Weighing Less than 10 Pounds: Install 1 slack No. 12 gage hanger wire from
fixture to structure above.
b. For Lighting Fixtures Weighing 10 to 56 Pounds: Install 2 slack No. 12 gage hanger wires from fixture to
structure above.
c. For Lighting Fixtures Weighing More than 56 Pounds: Support directly from the structure above by
hangers approved by the AHJ. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 48 for seismic restraints.
d. For Pendant Hung Lighting Fixtures: Support directly from structure with No. 9 gage hanger wire or
alternate support without using ceiling suspension system for direct support approved by the AHJ.
Comply with requirements in Section 24 05 48 for seismic restraints.
D. Provide gypsum board protection acceptable to the AHJ to ensure fire rating of ceiling in which fixtures are installed.
E. Coordination Meetings:
1. Meet at least twice with ceiling installer. Hold first meeting before submittal of Shop Drawings to coordinate
each light fixture mounting condition with ceiling type. During second meeting, coordinate fixture layout in
each area.
2. Meet at least once with the mechanical installer prior to fabrication and installation of duct work. Coordinate
depth and location of fixtures and duct work in areas.
F. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.
G. Protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period. Repair nicks and scratches to appearance of
original finish.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and electrical circuitry, energize circuitry and demonstrate
capability and compliance with requirements. Repair malfunctioning units on site, then retest to demonstrate
compliance. If not possible to repair on site, remove and provide new units and retest. Include copy of test reports in
the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
B. At Substantial Completion, remove and provide new lamps in interior lighting fixtures which are observed to be
noticeably dimmed due to Contractor's use and testing as judged by the A/E.
3.06 COMMISSIONING
A. The equipment and systems referenced in this section are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General
Commissioning Requirements and Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems. The contractor has
specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation.
Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 93 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING CONTROLS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 93 00 - 1
SECTION 26 93 00 – LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: Work includes an integrated, energy saving lighting control system including lighting control panels,
emergency lighting transfer devices, and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01, and Sections 26 05 00 apply to Work in this section.
C. The contractor shall provide all related conduit, wire, boxes, and mounting hardware to provide a complete and
functional installation.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NEMA 410, Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Fluorescent
Ballasts.
2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
3. UL 508, Standard for Industrial Control Panels.
4. UL 916, Standard for Energy Management Equipment.
5. UL 924, Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
C. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
D. Factory Assembly: All relays, touch tablet graphic user interfaces, controllers, enclosures, switch stations, photo
sensors, occupancy sensors and miscellaneous components shall be factory assembled and tested. All system
components shall arrive at the job site completely pre-wired and ready for installation, requiring only the connection
of lighting circuits and network terminations. All connections shall be made to clearly and permanently labeled
termination points. Systems that require field assembly shall not be acceptable.
E. All system components shall comply with all applicable sections of NEC, NEMA, and FCC.
F. UL Approvals: All applicable equipment shall be tested to and listed under UL standard 508 and shall bare labels to
indicate compliance. Lighting control relays shall be tested to UL standard 508 for both safety and endurance.
System listed other ETL or other UL sections shall provide documentation proving compliance with UL standard 508.
G. Title 24: All applicable system components and the system as a whole shall be certified as complying with Title 24
requirements.
H. Contractor responsible for confirming panels and sensor interoperate as a single system.
I. Contractor must schedule two pre-construction meetings with Controls Specialist from firm representing nLight to
review requirements for a successful install of all lighting controls. One meeting must be at the beginning of
construction to plan cable paths and installation requirements.
J. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that products will meet product specifications and local energy codes. If any
additional equipment is required to meet coverage patterns and local energy codes, provide additional equipment at
no additional cost to the Owner.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and maintenance data for each type of lighting control
system and components prior to fabrication and shipment.
C. Specifications Compliance: Submit a line-by-line comparison that describes the differences between each
specifications requirement and the equipment / systems being proposed. Comparison shall include a complete listing
of how the proposed equipment / systems differ from that specified with regard to size, quantity, quality, method of
control, features and functions, control software functions and installation requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 93 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING CONTROLS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 93 00 - 2
D. Bill of Materials: Provide as part of the submittal package a detailed itemized listing of all proposed equipment,
including quantities and capacities for all major system components.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify all control wire requirements with the lighting controls
manufacturer prior to rough in.
F. Shop Drawings:
1. Floor plans and reflected ceiling plans showing occupancy and daylight sensor locations. Include typical
mounting details for occupancy and daylight sensors.
2. Detailed point to point wiring diagrams.
3. System one-line diagram showing panels, number and type of switches and sensors, low voltage switches,
and building energy management system computer.
4. Drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and numbering.
5. Panel wiring schedules.
6. Typical wiring diagrams for each component.
G. Test Reports:
1. Field test reports.
2. Submit completed copy of reports and include copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
H. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify all control wire requirements with the lighting controls
manufacturer prior to rough in.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The contractor shall not install lighting control system components in spaces where the ambient temperature cannot
be maintained between 0 degrees to 40 degrees C (32 degrees to 104 degrees F) with a maximum humidity of 90%,
noncondensing.
B. All stored and installed lighting control components shall be adequately protected from dust and dirt.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The lighting control manufacturer shall warrant the system to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of 5
years from shipment.
B. The warranty shall include replacement parts deemed necessary to restore the system to normal operation.
C. The manufacturer shall provide telephone technical support and remote diagnostics where applicable during normal
business hours excluding manufacturer holidays.
D. Upon request, the manufacturer shall make available for purchase service contract option(s) which include on-site
technician visits for service and repair.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide lighting control system hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single
manufacturer.
B. System components shall be UL listed under the UL916 Energy Management Equipment standard.
2.02 DIGITAL ROOM CONTROLLER
A. Install room Controller(s) to control the quantity of lighting and plug loads required.
B. Where indicated, the room controller shall provide 0 - 10 volt dimming capability for the required number of
dimmable lighting loads.
C. The room controller shall integrate the functionality of connected control components including wall switch stations,
occupancy sensors and daylight sensors to provide the required sequence of operation for the space.
D. Room controllers and associated room control components shall operate in a totally stand-alone mode and not
require the use of a network, software, computer or server for local control functions.
E. Mechanical:
1. The room controller housing shall measure 5.75" X 3.85" X 1.3" and be constructed of GSM UL rated 94 HB
plastic approved for use in a return air plenum.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 93 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING CONTROLS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 93 00 - 3
2. The housing and shall include an integral 1/2" chase nipple for external mounting to standard junction box
knockout.
3. Two RJ45 Smart Port connectors shall be accessible on the side of the enclosure for connection of room
control devices.
4. Two recessed push buttons and associated LED indicators shall be accessible on the top of the enclosure to
provide override, status, set-up and testing functions.
F. Electrical:
1. The room controller shall have a single power feed and shall be capable of operation at voltages between
120- and 347-volts AC, 50/60 Hz.
2. One or two output relays (model specific) shall provide a total combined power switching capacity of 20 amps
per unit.
3. Where indicated provide one or two independent 0 - 10 volt dimming channels (model specific) for full range
dimming control of fixtures equipped with compatible dimmable ballast or driver.
4. Each dimming output shall have a current sinking capacity of at least 30 mA.
5. The room controller shall be capable of supplying 250 mA of Class 2 auxiliary DC power for use by wall switch
stations, occupancy sensors, and daylight sensors connected to the room controller's four RJ45 Smart Port
connectors.
6. Where indicated, room controllers shall be equipped with power monitoring circuitry capable of measuring and
reporting the total connected load for each room controller.
G. Functional:
1. Provide an integral pushbutton and LED indicator for each load for status and to allow operation of the relays
and dimmers for testing and verification without requiring other control devices to be connected.
2. The room controller shall have a default operation providing an automatic logical sequence of operation for
each load as the room control devices are plugged into the Smart Port connectors.
3. Default operation for occupancy sensors shall be automatic on, automatic off for all loads.
4. Upon connection of a switch, the operation shall automatically change to manual on, automatic off (vacancy)
mode for all loads.
5. Provide capability to convert each load independently to automatic on or vacancy mode using only the integral
push buttons and LED indicators on the room controller.
6. When in vacancy mode, provide a 30 second grace period after an off during which automatic on shall be
temporarily enabled.
7. It shall be possible to connect up to eight (8) room controllers together using Cat5 patch cables to provide
configurations up to 16 switched and dimmed loads operating as a single zone.
8. Provide the following set up and configuration functions without the need for additional devices or software:
a. Assign/reassign relays for control by wall switch station buttons
b. Configure relays for occupancy or vacancy operation
c. Assign/reassign dimmers to raise/lower switches
d. Assign dimming channels for response to daylight sensor control
e. Auto calibrate default daylight sensor sequence of operation
f. Save preset scenes
9. The optional nIO BT Bluetooth® radio module and smart phone app shall allow wireless setup and
configuration of the room controller and connected devices through a user supplied IOS or Android smart
phone or tablet. The application shall provide as a minimum:
a. Configure wall switch button types. At a minimum, button types shall include toggle on/off with pilot,
preset, on only and off only
b. Configure up to six zones of daylight harvesting per room with independent set points
c. Include or exclude loads from occupancy sensor control
d. Configure up to 16 load groups per room
e. Configure up to 16 preset scenes per room
f. Set independent occupied and unoccupied conditions for each relay and dimmer
g. Adjust dimmer high and low trim points
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 93 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING CONTROLS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 93 00 - 4
h. Manually control loads allowing use of the phone or tablet as a personal control for the room The
Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by the manufacturer is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of
their respective owners.
2.03 NETWORK BRIDGE MODULE
A. The nBRG8 network bridge module allows multiple room controller zones to be networked with other selected
manufacturers system devices for whole building administration of lighting control functions.
B. The network bridge housing shall measure 4.90" X 4.90" X 1.05"and be constructed of GSM UL rated 94 HB plastic
approved for use in a return air plenum.
C. The bridge shall connect to and be powered from a room controller smart port via a standard Cat5 cable.
D. Two additional RJ-45 ports on the bridge shall provide an in and out connection point for an Ethernet based network.
E. The network bridge module shall provide a communication link between the room control devices and the systems
controller via an Ethernet based network. At a minimum, the network link shall provide the following functionality
through a web browser user interface:
1. Report the current occupancy status for each lighting control zone
2. Indicate the status of each relay and dimming channel
3. Allow reconfiguration of system device input and output parameters
4. Set up daylight harvesting for zones equipped with photocells
5. Configure and download schedules to panels and Room Controllers
2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Occupancy sensors shall be ceiling or wall mounted and use dual technology (microphonics and passive infrared),
microphonics and/or passive infrared (model specific) sensing technology as indicated.
B. Sensors shall be Class 2 and connect to any room controller smart port using a wiring adaptor and standard Cat5
patch cable.
C. Occupancy sensors shall be self adaptive and not require manual calibration after installation. Digital circuitry and
logic shall automatically make adjustments to the sensitivity and time delay based on learned occupancy patterns
and the environment in which the sensor is installed.
D. Sensors using both microphonics and passive infrared (dual technology) shall operate such that detection by both
technologies is required to initiate occupancy and continued detection by either technology will maintain occupancy.
E. Up to four occupancy sensors may be connected to one room controller.
2.05 DAYLIGHT SENSORS
A. The daylight sensor shall provide ambient light level information to the room controller allowing daylight responsive
lighting control.
B. The system shall operate in an open loop sequence of operation reducing the amount of electric light as the quantity
of daylight entering the room increases.
C. It shall be possible to configure up to six daylight zones in a room. Each zone shall be programmable to
proportionally respond to the light level provided by the daylight sensor.
D. The daylight sensor shall be mounted and positioned to provide an unobstructed view of the windows per the
manufacturer's directions.
2.06 SYSTEM CONTROLLER
A. Web browser-based system programming, monitoring and administration shall be provided by the systems
controller.
B. The system controller shall have the ability to communicate by means of TCP/IP over Ethernet allowing enterprise
connectivity between the Distributed Lighting Control System and external LAN or WAN networks.
C. Mechanical:
1. The systems controller electronics shall be housed in a NEMA 1 industrial grade enclosure suitable for
surface wall mounting in an electrical/mechanical room.
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 93 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING CONTROLS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 93 00 - 5
2. The enclosure shall measure 13.5" H x 14.5" W x 4" D and include a screw on cover with a hinged locking
door.
3. Provide standard knock outs eliminating the need for field drilling or cutting of the enclosure which could
damage the electronics.
D. Electrical:
1. Then systems controller shall have a 120VAC, 60Hz hard wired supply connection. Servers or controllers
using plug-in type power sources shall not be acceptable.
E. Functional
1. The systems controller shall function as a web server allowing the user interface to be accessible through a
standard web browser.
2. The installation of software shall not be required. At a minimum, the user interface shall provide the following
functions:
a. Automatic discovery of lighting control system devices
b. Commissioning of devices into logical Areas and Zones.
c. Display the entire system in a logical navigation tree view
d. Allow the user to name Zones, Groups, Presets, Schedules and individual loads
e. Set up control functions for system inputs and outputs
f. Monitor status and override individual relays and dimmers
g. Set up and download schedules to panels and room controllers
h. Monitor real-time power use at each room controller
2.07 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INTERFACE
A. Where emergency lighting is to be controlled by the lighting control system, provide a nPP16ER UL924 listed load
control relay as necessary to ensure that emergency lights are automatically turned full on upon loss of normal
power to the area.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. The lighting controls shall be installed in accordance with specifications and specific guidelines and submittal
documents provided by the lighting control manufacturer. Where these conflict, the more stringent requirements
govern.
C. Where variations from the general specifications or drawings exist, the contractor shall request a clarification prior to
rough in or installation.
D. The contractor shall verify all wire type and routing requirements with the lighting controls manufacturer prior to
installation. Not part of this section are requirements for work including, but not limited to, raceways, electrical
boxes, junction boxes, circuit protection, wiring, and fittings required for installation of the lighting control equipment.
E. Installation Assistance: During the installation process, the manufacturer shall provide, at no cost, technical support
via a toll-free telephone line to the installing contractor or owner’s representative to answer questions and supply
additional information when required.
3.04 STARTUP AND PROGRAMMING
A. The system manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized field engineer to the project site after installation has
been completed and prior to system energization for the purpose of testing and adjustment of the system. Factory
field engineer shall test and verify all system functions and ensure proper operation of the system components in
Building J First Floor Remodel - Phase 1 26 93 00
Renton Technical College LIGHTING CONTROLS
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 6
September 30, 2022 26 93 00 - 6
accordance with the specifications and on-site conditions. The installing contractor shall notify the system
manufacturer in writing that the system is completely wired and ready to be energized and tested 2 weeks prior to
scheduling a field engineer for start-up of the system. Should the field engineer arrive on the job site and find the
installation incomplete, the installing contractor shall pay the cost of any future visits by the field engineer required to
complete the system start-up.
B. During the start-up procedure, the factory field engineer shall provide programming assistance and guidance to the
building operating personnel to program the systems for initial operation.
C. Allow for up to 4 hours of on-site training on the use and maintenance of the lighting control system to be scheduled
at the completion of startup and programming of the system.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. System Startup: Manufacturer’s authorized technician shall confirm proper installation and operation of system
components. Start-up requirement shall verify:
1. Occupancy and daylighting sensors are located, installed, and adjusted as required by the factory, the
Contract Documents, and the Washington State Energy Code.
2. Occupancy sensors and daylighting sensors are operating within manufacturers specifications.
3. Sensors, room controllers and relay panels interact as a complete and operational system to meet
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer shall submit written statement verifying that system meets above requirements. Include copy of test
reports in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
C. Commission photocells with no daylight component present. Adjust photocells as required to set initial footcandle
level to 40fc average throughout the respective daylight zone.
3.06 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
A. The lighting controls manufacturer shall provide reasonable access to factory direct telephone technical support
during normal business hours.
3.07 COMMISSIONING
A. The equipment and systems referenced in this section are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General
Commissioning Requirements and Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems. The contractor has
specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation.
Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 00 Renton Technical College GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 7
September 30, 2022 27 05 00 - 1
SECTION 27 05 00 – GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: Work includes materials, equipment, labor, supervision, tools and items necessary for the construction, installation, connection, testing and operation of telecommunications work. This section applies to all Divisions 27, and 28 sections with the exception of Fire Alarm Systems.
B. General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections apply to Work in this section.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Perform work in accordance with requirements of the state in which the work is performed.
B. Conform to applicable industry standards, UL standards, NEMA standards, and other standards as noted.
1. Notify the A/E of deviations in Contract Documents to applicable codes and ordinances prior to installation of the Work. Perform changes in the Work after initial installation due to requirements of code enforcing agencies at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If conflict occurs between legally adopted codes and the Contract Documents, the codes prevail, except that this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with requirements of the Contract Documents which may exceed code requirements and not contrary to same.
3. Arrange for and pay for required telecommunications permits, fees, and inspections.
C. Operating Conditions: 1. Temperature: Minus 20 deg C to plus 40 deg C.
2. Altitude: Up to 3,300 feet (100 meters).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and with additional requirements indicated in this article.
B. Product Data: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 013300 for electronic submittals.
2. Submit prior to fabrication of assemblies and delivery of purchased items. 3. Submit complete at one time. Partial product submittals not acceptable and will be returned unreviewed.
4. Clearly mark catalog pages, equipment, and model number to be used. Note required accessories. 5. Format: Electronic
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit as specified in the individual specification sections. Submit minimum 30 days prior to starting fabrication on installation work. Do not fabricate on install until reviewed by the A/E. Include complete location dimensions, and hanger and support sizes and dimensions. 2. “Typical” drawings and wiring diagrams not accepted unless they specifically apply to this project.
3. Drawings shall be drawn at sufficient scale to show details clearly on same size sheets as Drawings. 4. Show required coordination with work of other trades.
5. Identify details and show their locations in Project. 6. Include description of configuration and operation of proposed systems.
7. Include outline drawings of proposed equipment in plan and elevation views including overall dimensions, weights, and clearance required. 8. Include one-line telecommunications diagrams.
9. CAD Drawings: AutoCAD floor plan backgrounds are available in electric format and shall be requested from the A/E. 10. Direct use of the Drawings as the basis of Contractor’s prepared Shop Drawings not acceptable.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 00 Renton Technical College GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 7
September 30, 2022 27 05 00 - 2
D. Approval: Approval of a manufacturer’s name or product by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in detail with requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Re-Submittals: Clearly identify re-submittals. Provide revised tabs, indexes, page renumbering, and other formats to interface with original submittal. Identify changes and include date for project tracking.
F. Test reports and Certificates: Submit as a package prior to Substantial Completion.
G. Certifications: Submit written certifications from the governing building authorities stating that work has been inspected and accepted, and complies with applicable codes and ordinances.
H. Record Drawings: Comply with Article “Record Drawings” in this section.
I. Schedule of Values: 1. Comply with the requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements as indicated in this paragraph.
2. Include costs in Schedule of Values as follows: a. Mobilization.
b. Submittals. c. Low Voltage Permit.
d. Low Voltage – Telecommunications Pathway Rough-in, Material. e. Low Voltage – Telecommunications Pathway Rough-in, Labor.
f. Low Voltage – Telecommunications Cabling, Material. g. Low Voltage – Telecommunications Cabling, Labor.
h. Low Voltage – Audio Visual Rough-in, Material. i. Low Voltage – Audio Visual Rough-in, Labor.
j. Low Voltage – Intrusion Detection Rough-in, Material. k. Low Voltage – Intrusion Detection Rough-in, Labor.
l. Punch List and Close Out. m. Testing.
1.04 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Division 01 for definitions and abbreviations. Additional definitions and abbreviations are as follows.
B. “Approved” or “Approval” means written approval by the owner or “Owner’s agent” (A/E).
C. “Codes” means AHJ adopted codes, rules, and ordinances and additional codes as specified herein.
D. “Concealed” means spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings, below floors, between double walls, furred-in areas, pipe and duct shafts, and similar spaces.
E. The word “Contractor”, as used in Divisions 27, and 28 sections, means the telecommunications subcontractor.
F. “Coordination”, “Coordinating”, and “Coordinate” means to bring, or the bringing, into a common action, movement, or combination so as to act together in a smooth concerted way.
G. “Directed”, “Requested”, “Accepted”, and Similar Terms means these terms imply “by the A/E” unless otherwise indicated.
H. “Exposed” means open to view. For example, raceways installed in a tunnel or raceways installed in a room and not covered by other construction.
I. “Furnish” means supply and deliver to the project site ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar activities.
J. “Indicated” and “Indicated on the Drawings” means shown on Drawings by notes, graphics or schedules, or written into other portions of Contract Documents. Terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled” and “specified” have same meanings as “indicated”, and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 00 Renton Technical College GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 7
September 30, 2022 27 05 00 - 3
K. “Install” means to place in position for service or use. Includes operations at project site, such as unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, preserving, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar activities.
L. “Provide” means furnish and install for a complete, finished, and operable system and ready for intended use.
M. “Shop Drawings” means Document which fully details equipment and intended installation relative to this specific Project.
N. “Substantial Completion” shall mean that the entire project (or readily definable portion thereof if so designated in the Contracted Documents) is acceptable to code enforcement authorities and to extent required by such authorities, has been inspected and approved by such authorities, and is suitable for occupancy by the Owner or occupant for the purpose intended. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01 for additional requirements.
O. “Work” or “Project” means entire scope of work required by the Contract Documents.
P. Abbreviations: A/E Architect AHJ Authorities Having Jurisdiction ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials C Degrees Celsius ETL Environmental Technology Laboratory F Degrees Fahrenheit FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation IBC International Building Code NEC National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 (latest adopted edition with Amendments) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. RMS Root Mean Square THD Total Harmonic Distortion V Volts
1.05 MATERIALS
A. Where 2 or more manufacturers are listed, select for use any of those listed. The first mentioned, in general, was used as the basis of design. Bids on any manufacturer named acceptable as long as that manufacturer meets every aspect of the Contract Documents. Note that equipment layout is based on equipment listed in equipment schedules.
B. Where other than the first named manufacturer is selected, include cost of resulting work and redesign of associated services and structure. Include redesign drawings with Shop Drawings.
C. Ensure that equipment will fit within available space, including manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
1.06 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
A. Materials and Equipment: UL listed and labeled or other AHJ approved testing laboratory and in compliance with other industry standards as specified.
B. Equipment shall be manufacture’s regularly catalogued items and shall be supplied as a complete unit in accordance with manufacturer’s standard specifications and any optional items required for proper installation for equipment unless otherwise noted. Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and best trade practices.
C. Products shall be new unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
D. Fabricator and Manufacturer Qualifications: Specialists with at least 5 years of experience and regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment and materials specified.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 00 Renton Technical College GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 7
September 30, 2022 27 05 00 - 4
E. Furnish products of a single manufacturer for items which are used in quantity. A Product, for the purpose of this paragraph, is an assembly of components such as switchboards, transformers, panelboards, and similar items. Materials such as wire and cable, raceways, outlet boxes, and similar items not requiring maintenance are not included in the single manufacturer requirement of this paragraph.
F. Installer Qualifications: Specialists with at least 5 years of experience and regularly engaged in the installation of the system, equipment, and materials specified. Where required by the AHJ, employ licensed trades persons.
1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this article.
B. Substitutions will be considered following bid award only when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
C. Where “Manufacturer” paragraphs include the words “or approved”, prior approval of the proposed substitution is required. The A/E is sole judge of quality of proposed substitution.
D. When the A/E approves a substitution request, the approval is given with the understanding that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.
E. Whenever a Product is described by detail, specification, trade name, manufacturer’s name or catalog reference, use only such Product, unless written approval is given for substitution prior to bid. Submit written requests on substitution request form included in Division 01. Approved substituted manufacturers will be listed by Addendum.
F. Provide as specified certain products, materials, and systems where “manufacturer” paragraphs are followed by the words “no substitutions”.
G. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or product data submittals, without separate written prior approval, or when approval will require revision to the Contract Documents.
1.08 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. General: The telecommunications drawings are diagrammatic. Complete details of building features which affect telecommunications installation may not be shown. For additional details, refer to other Contract Documents. Report any discrepancies to the A/E along with suggested revisions. Obtain written response from the A/E before proceeding with changes.
B. Depiction of Work: Drawings do not show the exact characteristics of the work including, physical arrangement of equipment, lengths of wiring or conduit runs. Base work on actual field measurements and conditions. Provide work required to complete the installation.
C. Dimensions: Do not scale drawings. Dimensional accuracy is not guaranteed, and field verification of dimensions, locations, and levels to suit field conditions is required.
D. Since the Drawings of floor, wall, and ceiling installation are made at small scale, outlets, devices, equipment, and similar items are indicated only in their approximate location. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls, and ceilings where not dimensioned and coordinate such locations with work of other trades to prevent interferences.
E. Discrepancies: Field verify dimensions and existing conditions prior to performing work. Bring to the A/E’s attention any discrepancies within the Contract Documents and between the Contract Documents and field conditions. Also, for any design and layout changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to the Contractor’s work (equipment and material purchasing and installation). Any corrective work required by the Contractor after his discovery of such discrepancies, inconsistencies, or ambiguities shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 00 Renton Technical College GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 7
September 30, 2022 27 05 00 - 5
F. Specifications: These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. The imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words “shall be” are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases.
1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01, with additional requirements as indicated in this article.
B. Prepare Record Drawings. Record Drawings shall be new blue line prints (pencil and black pen not acceptable) and shall show the measured locations of portions of the Work and changes the Contractor has made.
C. Record corrections and changes made during the progress of the work, showing work as actually installed. In general, tolerance plus or minus 1’-0” from actual location. Indicate installed locations for underground raceways. Neatly hand-draft on daily basis. Keep readily available at project site. Use latest revisions and keep neat and clean. Do not use Contractor’s working drawings.
D. Record Drawings are subject to review by the A/E on a regular basis throughout construction. At end of construction, check drawings for completeness and accuracy.
E. Drawings shall show addendum items, change orders, clarifications, supplemental instructions, and deviations from the Drawings.
F. Per project closeout procedures, submit in AutoCAD format along with corrected blue line drawings. Each sheet shall be noted as “RECORD DRAWING”.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Divisions 27, and 28 work with other trades.
B. Be aware of restricted space for installation of telecommunications systems. Include offsets and perform rerouting and coordination to fit elements in available space. Include provisions for such requirements in bid.
C. Telecommunications equipment and systems shown are based on existing drawings as available and on limited project site observations to the extent possible under current conditions. Field verify existing conditions prior to commencement of work. Obtain specific locations of structural and architectural features or equipment items from referenced drawings, field measurements, or trade providing material or equipment.
D. Be responsible for beam penetrations as they relate to the telecommunications work. Submit sizes and locations to the structural engineer for review and determination of structural details.
E. Coordinate attachments to structure to verify that attachment points on equipment and structure can accept seismic, weight, and other loads imposed.
F. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for location of expansion and seismic joints. Provide flexible loops for raceways and cable trays crossing expansion and seismic joints.
1.11 WORKMANSHIP
A. Work shall be in accordance with best trade practices. Remove substandard workmanship and provide new material at no extra cost to the Owner.
1.12 CERTIFICATION
A. By submitting a bid for the telecommunications, electronic safety and security systems, the Contractor and his subcontractors acknowledge and certify the following: 1. That they have carefully examined and fully understand the Drawings and Specifications (including but not limited to architectural, site, utility, mechanical, structural and telecommunications drawings and specifications. In addition, they have determined that the Drawings and Specifications are adequate to complete the telecommunications systems and that they can provide a complete finished and operable system in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. That they have had a reasonable opportunity to discover any ambiguities in the Contract Documents and such ambiguities have been brought to the attention of the A/E in writing prior to submitting the bid.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 00 Renton Technical College GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 7
September 30, 2022 27 05 00 - 6
3. That they have reviewed the project progress schedule with the general contractor, fully understand the schedule, and they have verified, prior to submitting a bid, availability of necessary labor and materials, including supervision and office backup, and can comply with the schedule requirements. 4. That there may be changes to the scope of work and that they understand that any proposal submitted for performance of additional work shall include costs associated with such change including but not limited to labor, materials, subcontracts, equipment, taxes, fees, schedule impact, loss of efficiency, supervision, overhead and profit.
5. That the Contract requires them to coordinate their work with that of other trades and that responsibility for coordination includes rerouting, offsets, and similar provisions, to fit Work and address manufacturer’s recommended clearances for service access, maintenance, and replacement of equipment in a manner that is compatible with work of other trades in the same area. 6. That routing of elements of low voltage systems shown on the Drawings is schematic only and that offsets and rerouting probably will be required in installation and that labor and materials have been included for such in their bids.
7. That they have consulted with affected utilities and included in their bids labor and materials to meet requirements which may be imposed by each utility and have included in their bids costs and fees to be paid to such utilities, including temporary services and temporary and permanent connections unless specifically excluded in the Contract Documents. 8. That they understand submittals of material and equipment to the A/E is for the purpose of establishing what they are providing for the project. Any review undertaken by the A/E does not relieve them of their responsibilities to furnish and install materials and equipment required for work in the project nor does such review relieve them of their responsibilities for coordination with other trades and designers to ensure that such materials and equipment will fit and be suitable for purpose intended.
9. That they agree to receive payment for bid amounts as full compensation for furnishing materials and labor which may be required in prosecution and completion of work required under the Contract Documents, and in respects to complete the contract work to the satisfaction of the A/E. 10. That they include in their bids costs to furnish bonds as specified in the Contract Documents.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Conform to requirements in General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01. Where not so prescribed or defined, the period shall be 1 year. Warranty periods within Divisions 27, and 28 shall not commence until final acceptance. Contractor shall extend longer warranties specified in other sections.
1.14 EQUIPMENT OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (OFCI)
A. Material Handling and Delivery: Coordinate delivery of OFCI equipment. Receive, off load, transport, store, hoist, unpack, dispose of packing, same as for other project equipment arriving at job site. Requirements of the Contract Documents apply to OFCI equipment.
B. Operations and Maintenance Data: Obtain from the Owner operations and maintenance data for the OFCI equipment and incorporate them into the Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
1.15 DEMONSTRATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this article.
B. Following installation of low voltage work and prior to final acceptance, demonstrate that equipment and systems operate as indicated in the Contract Documents and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Perform in presence of the A/E and Owner’s representative, unless otherwise directed by the A/E. Give minimum 1 week notice prior to demonstrations.
D. Provide instruments and personnel required to conduct demonstrations.
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01.
B. Prepare list of items that are not complete prior to asking for a substantial completion review by the A/E.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 00 Renton Technical College GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 7 of 7
September 30, 2022 27 05 00 - 7
1.17 ALTERNATES
A. General: See Bid Form and Alternates described in Division 01 for possible effect on work of Division 27.
1.18 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare Operations and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and materials furnished under Divisions 27, and 28.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this article.
C. Submit 1 copy of Operations and Maintenance Manuals for review at least 2 weeks prior to Substantial Completion date. Assemble Operations and Maintenance Manual in 3-ring binder(s). Use multiple binders if pages in a single binder would exceed 4 inch thickness. Separate binders for each category, such as Telecommunications, and Electronic Safety and Security. Where one subject matter encompasses more than one binder, differentiate by volume numbers. Include indexed tabs for each binder. Engrave cover with the project title in 1/2 inch high letters and name and address of the Contractor in 1/4 inch high letters. Provide same information in 1/8 inch high letters on spine. Provide as electronic version in PDF format where required by the architect per Division 01.
D. Include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in clearly and easily understandable form. Include serial numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, motor ratings, and similar information. Each item of equipment shall have its own individual sheet. (Example: If 2 items of equipment A and D appear on the same sheet, individual sheet shall be included for each unit specified).
E. Include the Following Information: 1. Identifying name and mark number.
2. Certified outline drawings and Shop Drawings. 3. Parts list.
4. Performance curves and data. 5. Wiring diagrams.
6. Manufacturer’s recommended operating and maintenance instructions. 7. Vendor’s name, address and telephone number for all parts and equipment.
8. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor performing the work. 9. Test reports.
10. Product data and Record Drawings.
1.19 PUNCHLIST AND FINAL REVIEWS
A. At the time of punchlist and final reviews, the project telecommunications foreman shall accompany the reviewing party, and remove coverplates, panel covers and other access panels as requested to allow review of entire telecommunications system.
1.20 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Engineering services required beyond the final completion date shall be paid by the Contractor at a rate of $135 per hour.
B. Punchlists will be done at Substantial Completion and final completion dates. Submit Record Drawings and final Operations and Maintenance Manuals prior to Substantial Completion date. Subsequent reviews shall be paid by the Contractor at a rate of $135 per hour.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 10 Renton Technical College BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) AND METHODS Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 27 05 10 - 1
SECTION 27 05 10 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: Work includes basic telecommunication requirements specifically applicable to Divisions 27, and 28 sections including general material and installation requirements and site work.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections apply to the Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. UL Compliance: Where UL fire-resistance rating is indicated for construction penetrated by access units, furnish UL listed and labeled units, except for those units which are smaller than minimum size requiring ratings as recognized by governing authority.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, using means and methods to prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Deliver products to site in manufacturer’s original containers, complete with labels.
C. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
D. Store products subject to damage by weather conditions above ground, under cover in weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish specified items acceptable to AHJ as suitable for intended use.
B. New, unless otherwise indicated, free from defects and the standard products of reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment.
C. Furnish similar items of equipment by same manufacturer.
D. Materials and Equipment: UL listed and labeled or other AHJ approved testing laboratory and in compliance with other industry standards as specified.
E. Remove rejected or damaged material from site.
F. Samples may be required for non-standard or substituted items before installation. Submit samples as required in specific specification sections.
G. Furnish required items necessary for installation and testing procedures.
2.02 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
A. Posted Operating Instructions: Furnish simplified, consolidated equipment control and diagrams. Graphically represent entire system and actual equipment installed. Include concise written instructions on how to start and stop systems.
B. Copies of operating instructions shall be used with Operation and Maintenance Manuals as basis in training Owner’s employees in the operation and maintenance of systems and related installed equipment.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 10 Renton Technical College BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) AND METHODS Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 27 05 10 - 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of the various sections. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSPECTIONS
A. Confirm that installations have been inspected before enclosure within building features, buried, or otherwise hidden from view. Pay costs associated with uncovering or exposing installations and features not previously inspected and for repair to exposed surfaces.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to prevent damage as work is installed.
B. Obtain equipment rough-in dimensions from approved Shop Drawings or actual measurements.
C. Be familiar with the location of other trade’s equipment. Eliminate conflicts.
D. Layout electrical, telecommunications, and electronic safety and security work in advance of construction to eliminate unnecessary cutting, drilling, channeling, and similar activities. Where such cutting, drilling, channeling and similar activities become necessary for proper installation, perform with care using skilled mechanics of trades involved. Repair damage to building and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Perform cutting work of other trades only with consent of that trade. Cutting structural members not permitted without consent of the A/E.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work as specified and in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. Where these conflict, manufacturer’s instructions govern.
B. Review Architectural, Mechanical and other applicable drawings and applicable Shop Drawings to prevent devices and other equipment from being hidden behind doors, cabinets, counters, heating equipment, and similar items, or from being located in whiteboards, tackboards, glass panels, and similar items. Relocate devices and connections as directed by the A/E at no additional cost to the Owner if the work is not properly coordinated.
C. Where conduit, outlets, and apparatus are encased in concrete, locate and secure at point of installation. Check locations of electrical items before and after concrete and masonry installation and relocate displaced items.
D. Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, and similar items required for installation of Work specified in this division.
3.05 WORKMANSHIP
A. Work and materials will be subject to observation at any time by the Owner and the A/E.
B. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide calibrated torque wrenches and screwdrivers as required.
C. Cutting and Patching: Do not weld to, cut, or notch structural members or building surfaces without approval of the A/E. Restore surfaces neatly to original condition after cutting, channeling, chasing, and drilling of walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, and anchorage of conduit, raceways, and other equipment.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment, conduit, and fittings and remove packing cartons and other debris created by Divisions 27, and 28 Work.
B. Before Substantial Completion, carefully clean equipment, fixtures, exposed raceways and similar items. Remove construction labels, dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, and similar items. Clean fixtures, interiors and exteriors of equipment and raceways.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Mount operating instructions and diagrams near equipment or elsewhere as otherwise designated by the Owner.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 10 Renton Technical College BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) AND METHODS Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 27 05 10 - 3
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect equipment during and after hookup, painting, and final testing.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 12 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 2
September 30, 2022 27 05 12 - 1
SECTION 27 05 12 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: Work includes selective demolition of existing telecommunications work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Dust Control: Provide protective measures to minimize transfer of noise, dust, dirt, and refuse to adjacent areas of building. Such measure may include dust tight barriers, temporary walls, portable exhaust fans, vacuum systems, and temporary partitioning.
B. Extent: Keep areas of demolition as clean and orderly as physically possible. Do not allow demolition debris to accumulate. Gather debris and dispose daily. Broom or vacuum-clean work areas on daily basis.
C. Protection: Protect existing equipment, furnishing, and systems with protective coverings. Protect finished surfaces including floors, ceilings, and walls.
3.02 DAMAGES
A. Repairs: Promptly repair damage to existing surfaces, equipment, finishes, or adjacent facilities at no cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the A/E and the Owner.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. General: Provide demolition work required in existing building for removal of existing telecommunications equipment, raceways, and conductors and for installation of new telecommunications equipment, raceways, and conductors. Relocate and modify existing telecommunications equipment, raceways and conductors as required by general construction alterations and by installation of new telecommunications equipment, raceways, and conductors in existing building to achieve a complete and functioning installation as defined in the Contract Documents.
B. Extent: Remove and dispose of existing materials indicated in the Contract Documents to be removed.
C. Reuse: Do not reuse existing products unless indicated on the Drawings.
D. Materials to Owner: Deliver items to the Owner’s Representative as indicated in the Contract Documents.
E. Materials to Contractor: Materials other than those reserved by the Owner.
F. Existing Conditions: Comply with requirements in Division 01. Verify specific demolition work and operating conditions to be encountered from on-site review and coordination with the Owner. Maintain service to existing equipment and devices during new construction work as required by construction sequencing/scheduling provisions. In areas adjacent to new construction work, provide temporary services as necessary to meet these conditions. Protect active conductors encountered. Notify the A/E of utilities encountered whose services are not known.
G. Repair of Damages to Underground Utilities: Exact location of existing underground utilities is not definitely known. Should any underground utilities be damaged in excavations, restore such utilities without additional cost to the Owner.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 12 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 2
September 30, 2022 27 05 12 - 2
H. Drilling of Concrete: Drill openings through existing concrete with diamond tipped rotary core-drilling equipment or carbide tipped drills. In existing post tensioned slabs, locate and mark post tensioned strand locations with subsurface interface radar type locating equipment prior to drilling, cutting, and sawing operations.
I. Saw-Cutting of Concrete: Saw cut through existing concrete with diamond tipped or carbide tipped saw blade. In existing post tensioned slabs, locate and mark post tensioned strand locations with subsurface interface radar type locating equipment prior to drilling, cutting, and sawing operations.
3.04 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site unless reinstalled or delivered to the Owner as indicated in the Contract Documents. Transport and legally dispose of material off site.
B. Burning: Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.05 CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR
A. Clean-Up: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protection and leave interior areas clean.
B. Repair: Repair demolition performed in excess of that required at no additional cost to Owner. Return structures and surfaces to conditions existing prior to commencement of demolition work or as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 33 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 33 - 1
SECTION 27 05 33 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: Work includes conduit, electrical metallic tubing, wireway, surface metal raceway, and associated appurtenances.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. UL 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. UL 6, Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit.
3. UL 514B, Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. 4. UL 797, Standard for Metallic Tubing – Steel.
5. UL 1242, Standard for Intermediate Metal Conduit – Steel. 6. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Services International Standards.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and installation of telecommunications power connections.
D. Comply with applicable NEMA standards and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology herein. Comply with NEC for workmanship and installation requirements of raceway systems.
E. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes specified and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 270500.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of raceway system and appurtenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 6, hot-dip galvanized.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: UL 514B, threaded galvanized.
2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 1242, hot-dip galvanized.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: UL 514B, threaded galvanized.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 797, hot-dip galvanized.
B. Fittings: UL 514B, galvanized steel, insulated throat, raintight compression ring type through 1-1/4 inch, set screw type for 1-1/2 inch and larger. Drive-on type and cast fittings not acceptable.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 1, galvanized. UL listed for grounding as available. Aluminum and flexible metallic tubing not acceptable.
B. Fittings: Insulated throat, UL 514B, galvanized steel, UL listed for grounding as available.
2.05 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. UL 5, sheet metal channel with fitted cover. Type and size as shown on the Drawings.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 33 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 33 - 2
B. Finish: Enamel. Field paint to match wall color.
C. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Designed for use with raceway systems.
D. All raceway and fittings to be supplied by one manufacturer.
E. Manufacturers: Mono-Systems, Wiremold, or approved.
2.06 FIRE RATED SEALING COMPOUND
A. Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam or approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions, specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.
3.04 RACEWAY SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT
A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, size conduit for conductor type installed. Minimum size 3/4 inch for security and minimum size 1 inch for telecommunications.
B. Install conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance in unfinished spaces. Install a minimum of 9’-6” above finished floor in spaces unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
C. Install conduit concealed in walls, below floors, and above ceiling in spaces, except conduit may be exposed in mechanical rooms, telecommunications rooms, and similar unfinished spaces. Horizontal conduit installation is not allowed in floor slab unless specifically noted on telecommunications and structural drawings.
D. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to building planes.
E. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, heating and hot water pipes, and heating appliances.
F. Brace conduit or conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire-pulling operations.
G. Do not fasten or support with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove temporary conduit supports used during construction before conductors are pulled.
H. Do not cut structural members for passage of raceway.
3.05 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter. Deburr cut ends.
B. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and tighten securely.
C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations.
D. Do not use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction unless shown on the Drawings.
E. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in 2 inch conduit and larger.
F. Provide plastic bushings on conduit stubs used for transition from conduit to open cable runs.
G. During construction, use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 33 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 33 - 3
H. Distance Between Supports: 1. Threaded Rigid Metal Raceways: Maximum 8 foot centers and within 18 inches of each outlet, junction box, and bend.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Maximum 8 foot centers at each bend and within 12 inches of each outlet, junction box, and coupling. 3. Surface Metal Raceway: Maximum 5 foot centers or in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction, whichever is less, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
I. Install nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end origin and destination of each empty conduit.
J. Route conduit through roof inside openings for ductwork where possible. Otherwise, install through roof jack and seal weather tight.
K. Install no more than equivalent or two 90 degree bends between boxes.
L. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, install junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point.
M. Sealing of Conduit Penetrations:
1. Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade: Seal around penetrations with caulking approved by the A/E. For concrete construction above ground level, cast conduit in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. 2. Exterior Wall Surfaces Below Grade: Cast conduit into wall (and floor) or use manufactured seal assembly cast in place.
3. Roofs: Install mopped and flashing roof jack and where conduit penetrates roof membrane. 4. Fire Rated Construction: Seal penetrations with fire rated sealing compound to maintain fire rating of construction penetrated.
N. Sealing of Raceways: Seal interior of raceways that pass through building roof and through outside walls of building, above or below grade. Seal on end inside building. Use raceway sealing fittings manufactured for purpose sealed with non-hardening, compound-type mastic, specially designed for such service. Pack around wires in raceways.
O. Do not install conduit on exterior surface of building, except as shown on the Drawings and as approved by the A/E.
P. Where flexible metal conduit is installed, install bonding conductor to insure electrical continuity of raceway. Route bonding jumper inside conduit and terminate at grounding bushing or grounding locknut installed on inside of junction boxes at each side of flexible section. In instances where this method is not feasible (such as when cast boxes with hubs are used or where required by the NEC, route bonding jumper on outside of flexible conduit and terminate in accordance with methods acceptable to the AHJ.
Q. Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts.
R. Support raceways below roof decking to provide minimum 1-1/2” separation from raceway surface to nearest surface of metal roof decking.
S. In finished areas with exposed structure, subject to the approval of the A/E, raceways may be installed exposed. Install raceways as high as possible, tight to the ceiling deck, and neatly arranged. Submit shop drawing indicating routing of proposed surface raceways and boxes in finished areas.
3.06 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Use flat-head screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
B. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
C. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components for continuous grounding path.
D. Fastener Option: Use manufacturer’s standard clips and straps for installed purpose.
3.07 RACEWAY SCHEDULE
A. Rigid Metal Conduit:
1. Acceptable in all locations except as modified in this section.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 33 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 33 - 4
2. Where in contact with earth or concrete, install protective coating consisting of spirally wrapped 20 mil PVC tape with 1/2 inch minimum overlap – 3M Scotchrap Tape 51 or approved - or utilize PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit. Completely wrap and tape field joints. 3. Required for exposed raceways in areas subject to physical damage including but not limited to the following areas:
a. Loading Docks
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit: 1. May be used in lieu of rigid metal conduit unless otherwise prohibited by code or indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2. Not acceptable for circuits over 600 V.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: 1. Acceptable for dry interior locations where not exposed to moisture or physical damage.
2. Not acceptable for circuits over 600 V.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit: 1. For connections to door frames and devices installed in soffits, maximum six foot length.
E. Surface Metal and Multi-Outlet Raceway: Install where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 34 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 3
September 30, 2022 27 05 34 - 1
SECTION 27 05 34 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: Work includes outlet, junction, and pull boxes and associated appurtenances required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors, and for wire splices and branches.
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 apply to Work in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). 2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
3. UL 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 270500.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of outlet box and appurtenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES FOR INTERIOR WIRING
A. General: Outlet and pull boxes pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where applicable, minimum 4-11/16 inch size.
B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same manufacturer and to match raceway. Boxes shall accommodate standard devices and device plates.
C. Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete and mounting in masonry walls of type specifically designed for that purpose.
D. Ceiling Outlet Boxes: Galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1-1/2 inch deep (without fixture stud) and 2-1/8 inch deep (with fixture stud).
E. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 12 Inch in any Dimension: Include hinged enclosure.
2.02 SPECIALTY OUTLET BOXES
A. Recessed AV Wall Box 1. AV wall box shall be 14 gauge steel back box with 1/16 inch front cover and provide mounting space for telecommunications, AV and power devices. Dimensions shall be 11”W x 5.25”H x 3.57”D. The AV wall box shall include one AV low voltage conduit entry box accepting (6) single IPS inserts, telecom outlet box accepting industry standard faceplates, and one AC power outlet box accepting industry standard faceplates.
a. Manufacturer is FSR: 1) AV Wall Box, Part No. PWB-100-WHT
2) Low-Voltage Conduit Entry Box, Part No. PWB-100-CBB 3) Pass-Thru Rubber Bushing, Part No. IPS-B011Q, (AV)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 34 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 3
September 30, 2022 27 05 34 - 2
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality Assurance” provisions, specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.
3.04 COORDINATION OF OUTLET BOX LOCATIONS
A. Locate as shown on the Drawings and as required to facilitate pulling. Limit number of bends per NEC.
B. Telecommunications box locations shown on the Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets before roughing in.
C. Locate outlet boxes to allow access. If inaccessible, furnish, arrange, and pay for installation of access doors.
D. Coordinate Work of this section with the Work of other sections and trades to avoid conflicts. Check and verify door swings and locations of built-in cabinets, plumbing, heating, and ventilating equipment.
E. Install outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished under this or other divisions of the specifications. Make final connections thereto. Outlet boxes required if equipment is furnished with pigtail for external connection, does not have space to accommodate branch circuit wiring, or requires wire with insulation rating different from branch circuit wiring. Review equipment Shop Drawings for required outlet locations.
F. Where more than one outlet box is shown on the Drawings, and indicated to be at same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on center lines horizontally or vertically. Relocate outlet boxes which are not so installed (including lighting, receptacle, power, signal, and temperature control outlets) at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features, or where outlet boxes are centered between such features, such as between door jamb and cabinet, make these outlet box locations exact. Relocate outlet boxes which are not centered.
H. Flush mount boxes with front edge of box or plaster ring even with finished surface of wall and ceiling, except those mounted above accessible ceilings and where surface mounting is permitted.
I. Locate to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.
J. Route conduit from switch and receptacle boxes in walls vertically to space above ceiling. Install junction box before horizontal run.
K. Offset outlet boxes minimum of one stud horizontal separation between flush boxes mounted on opposite sides of acoustic rated common wall.
L. Install outlet boxes with minimum 6 inch horizontal separation between closest edges of flush boxes mounted on opposite sides of common wall.
3.05 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A. Anchor boxes so they will not shift or rock when devices are operated (including insertion and removal of cord caps).
B. Firmly anchor flush outlet boxes directly or with concealed bracing to studs and joists.
C. Close unused openings.
D. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast outlet boxes that are connected to 2 rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of outlet box.
E. Use multiple-gang outlet boxes where 2 or more devices are mounted together. Do not use sectional boxes.
F. Install blank covers or plates over outlet boxes that do not contain devices.
G. Install recessed outlet boxes in finished areas. Secure outlet boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.
H. Install outlet boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 34 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 3
September 30, 2022 27 05 34 - 3
I. Seal conduit boxes, telephone boxes, and similar items airtight with acoustical caulk where located in acoustical rated walls that are not fire rated.
J. Install outlet boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for outlet boxes. Use outlet boxes with sufficient depth to permit conduit hubs to be located in masonry void space.
K. Install pull boxes to be accessible after completion of building construction.
3.06 TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK, AND CASEWORK
A. Install as shown on the Drawings. Furnish templates to other trades for drilling and cutting to ensure accurate location of telecommunications devices as verified with the A/E.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 36 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAYS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 36 - 1
SECTION 27 05 36 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tests and services to install complete cable tray systems as shown on the drawings.
B. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to straight sections of cable trays, bends, tees, elbows, drop-outs, covers, supports and accessories.
C. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections apply to Work of this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
a. NEMA VE 1-1998 Metallic Cable Tray Systems b. NEMA VE 2-2000 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
3. ASTM International: a. ASTM A 123/A123M - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
b. ASTM A 510 - General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel c. ASTM B 633 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
d. ASTM A653/A653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 4. International Electrotechnical Commission:
a. 61537 – Cable Management - Cable Tray Systems and Cable Ladder Systems 5. ANSI/TIA-569-B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (May 2009)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 270500.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions for each type of cable tray and appurtenance.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate (using large scale) details of construction conditions, joints and accessories, dimensions, and finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TYPE OF CABLE TRAY
A. Cable tray shall be continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system to permit continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat.
2.02 MATERIALS AND FINISH
A. Wire mesh type shall be continuous rigid, carbon steel, welded at intersections. Material shall contain an electrozinc finish.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Wire mesh cable tray shall be manufactured with Safe-T-Edge design with the lateral wires welded to the bottom edge of the top wires eliminating any sharp edges.
2.04 DIMENSIONS
A. Wire mesh type cable tray shall be 4 inch in overall height. Width 18 inch.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 36 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAYS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 36 - 2
B. Straight cable tray sections shall be supplied in standard 10’-0” sections, except where shorter lengths are permitted to facilitate tray assembly lengths as shown on drawings.
2.05 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wire Mesh Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturer Cablofil, or approved equal:
a. 18”x4”: Cablofil Part No. CF 105/450
2.06 SPLICE PLATES
A. Cable tray sections shall be mechanically and electronically continuous at all splices, changes in elevation, etc. Connections between sections shall attach using hardware and accessories of the same manufacturer as the cable tray and shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Connections shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory as electrically continuous for purpose of grounding continuity, or supplemental bonding jumpers shall be provided at connections.
C. Splicing assembly shall be UL rated as a bonding interconnect between cable tray sections. 1. Manufacturer Cablofil, Part No. EDRN
2.07 BEND RADIUS SWEEPS
A. Provide sweeping bends in cable tray pathway as shown on the contract drawings. Field modify cable tray as required. Edges shall be sanded to a smooth finish and shall be free of sharp edges. Bend radius sweeps shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA-569B standard.
B. Bend radius support assemblies shall lock the cable tray sweep between cut sections of the side wall of the cable tray.
C. Bend radius support assemblies shall utilize the FAS system.
1. Manufacturer Cablofil, Part No. FASLOCK XL
2.08 CEILING SUPPORTS
A. Provide manufacturer’s recommended support mechanism or Unistrut support of cable tray for installation above the ceiling space. Unistrut width shall be a maximum of 2 inches greater than the longest width of cable tray.
B. Threaded rod shall be supported on each side of the support mechanism. Center hung supports shall be prohibited.
C. Provide all components for securing threaded rod to the ceiling structure, support and cable tray.
D. Cable tray supports shall be placed so that the support spans shall not exceed 5’-0” on center.
E. Unistrut supports shall utilize the FAS system. 1. Manufacturer Cablofil, Part No. FASP 550
2.09 WALL MOUNT SUPPORT
A. Provide manufacturer’s wall mounted brackets or Unistrut supports for cable tray installation on vertical and horizontal pathways mounted to the wall structure. Unistrut width shall be a maximum of 2 inches greater than the longest width of cable tray.
B. Provide necessary bolt and anchoring devices to attach cable tray and supports to the wall structure.
C. Unistrut supports for vertical transitions shall utilize the FAS Profile system.
1. Manufacturer Cablofil, Part No. FASP 450
D. L-bracket supports for horizontal mounting shall utilize the FAS Profile system. 1. Manufacturer Cablofil, Part No. FASL 450
2.10 LOADING CAPACITIES
A. Wire mesh cable trays shall be capable of carrying uniformly distributed cable load of 88.7 pounds per foot when supported on 8’ foot span when supported as a simple span and tested per NEMA VE1 Section 5.2.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 36 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAYS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 36 - 3
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Include related accessory items such as dropouts, end plates, barrier strips to separate services in trays support and seismic bracing components, grounding lugs, and installation rollers. Covers furnished for cable protection for vertical riser trays as they penetrate floors and similar applications.
B. Seismic Bracing Kit: 1. Provide seismic bracing of cable tray. Seismic bracing shall meet the requirements of the AHJ.
a. Manufacturer Cablofil, Part No. SZMCKIT
C. Cable Rollers: 1. Provide cable rollers for the installation of cabling in the cable tray pathway. Rollers shall be placed at all changes in direction, height transitions, before and after wall penetrations and entrances into telecommunications rooms.
a. Manufacturer Cablofil, Part No. FAS ROLLER
D. Straight Section Barrier Strip: 1. Provide barrier strip for separation of system cabling.
a. Manufacturer Cablofil: 1) 4”, Part No. COT 105
E. Provide all grounding and bonding of cable tray pathway to the nearest telecommunications grounding busbar.
F. Provide all miscellaneous hardware and components for a complete and operational pathway system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article 1.2 Quality Assurance provisions, specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.
B. Installation of cable trays shall be in accordance with applicable portions of ANSI/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
C. Cable tray shall be braced or anchored to resist a lateral force facing in any direction in accordance with the IBC, NEC and all local amendments to these codes and/or any other applicable requirements of the AHJ.
D. Contractor shall coordinate with the project structural engineer and the AHJ to determine the extent seismic bracing is required. Provide seismic bracing as required by the structural engineer and by the AHJ.
E. At the completion of installation, the cable tray system shall be level and plumb, and shall present a neat appearance. Cable tray interiors shall have no sharp edges or protrusions (to prevent abrasions of cabling or injury to personnel).
F. Install fire protection at all wall and floor penetrations. Install firestop material within installed cable trays after cabling has been installed through slot or sleeve penetrations.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this section.
B. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this section.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 05 36 Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAYS Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 4
September 30, 2022 27 05 36 - 4
3.04 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
A. Install cable tray system at locations indicated on the drawings. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that cable tray equipment comply with requirements of NEC and applicable portions of NFPA 70B. Reference NEMA-VE2 for general cable tray installation guidelines.
B. Support the cable tray on 5 foot centers for a total of 2 supports for every 10 foot span when the cable tray is supported from the ceiling. Support cable tray at every transition. Support cable tray utilizing wall mount brackets or Unistrut hangers.
C. Provide additional brackets on ends, and two additional brackets at tees and corners. Securely fasten cable tray to brackets and supports using clamps manufactured for the purpose. Provide all required inserts, hardware and supports.
D. Coordinate cable tray with electrical, mechanical and structural systems as necessary to properly integrate installation of cable tray.
E. Provide sufficient space encompassing cable trays to permit access for installing and maintaining cables. A minimum of 12” clearance shall be provided on one side and above the cable tray.
F. Cable tray fitting supports shall be located such that they meet the strength requirements of straight sections. Install fitting supports per NEMA VE-2 guidelines, or in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
G. Cutting: 1. Provide mechanical or power operated bolt cutters for providing changes in direction and height transitions with the cable tray. Adhere to manufacturer’s recommendations for devices and tools to provide the installation of the cable tray.
2. Cut wires in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Cut wires with side action bolt cutters to ensure integrity of galvanic protective layer.
4. Cut each wire with 1 clean cut to eliminate grinding or touch-up.
H. Install cable tray system using hardware, splice connectors, support components, and accessories furnished by manufacturer.
I. Cable tray shall be grounded in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and shall comply with requirements in Sections 260526 Grounding and 260527 Telecommunications Grounding System.
3.05 TESTING
A. Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections, and to demonstrate compliance with specified maximum grounding resistance. See NFPA 70B, Chapter 18, for testing and test methods.
END OF SECTION
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 1 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 1
SECTION 27 11 00 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description: Work includes the following:
1. Structured Cabling System supporting various low-voltage systems
2. Telecommunications Rooms and Spaces
3. Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure
4. Manufacturer Certification
B. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01 and 260500 sections apply to Work in this section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Sections
1. 270500 – General Telecommunications Provisions
2. 270510 – Telecommunications Materials and Methods
3. 270512 – Telecommunications Demolition
4. 270533 – Telecommunications Raceway Systems
5. 270534 – Telecommunications Outlet Boxes
6. 270536 – Telecommunications Cable Trays
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Installation Standards: Comply with following standards for cable and equipment installations. Publications
shall be latest issue and addenda:
a. NEC, National Electric Code.
b. NESC, National Electric Safety Code.
c. TIA-568.0-D, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises.
d. TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General
Requirements.
e. TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards.
f. TIA-569-D, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
g. TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building.
h. TIA-607-C Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) For Customer Premises.
i. TIA-862-B, Structured Cabling Infrastructure for Intelligent Building Systems.
j. IEEE 802.3-2000. Ethernet Standard.
k. BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual.
l. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.
2. Contractor shall have read the above documents and shall be familiar with the requirements that pertain to
this installation. The documents may be obtained from:
a. Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO, 80112-5776, 800-854-7179,
http://global.ihs.com/
b. BICSI, 8610 Hidden River Parkway, Tampa, FL, 33637, 800-242-7405, www.bicsi.org
3. Materials:
a. UL listed and labeled. Install label to be visible.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 2 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 2
b. Equipment: Regularly catalogued items of manufacturer and supplied as complete unit in accordance
with manufacturer's standard specifications with optional items required for proper installation unless
otherwise noted in this section.
c. Telecommunications connectivity and cabling independently tested to meet current TIA standards.
C. Qualifications:
1. Contractor performing work specified in this section is required to have special skills obtained by education,
experience, or both.
2. Contractors bidding work specified herein shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the
construction, testing, and servicing of systems of the type and magnitude specified in this section.
3. Contractor shall be a certified installer of the telecommunications system and pre-qualified by the
manufacturer for the purpose of offering the Applications Assurance warranty at the time of bid.
4. Contractor shall have direct access to the tools and test equipment required to complete the Work at the time
of bid.
5. Project manager (in office) and superintendent (field) shall have 5 years of experience at project manager and
superintendent levels, respectively, on completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and
complexity as to this project. Project manager shall be certified as a Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD) through Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI).
a. RCDD shall be a direct employee of the company bidding on said Work.
6. Field technicians who will work independently at any given time during the project on the structured cabling
system shall have a minimum of 3 years’ experience on completed telecommunications projects of like
magnitude and complexity as to this project. Field technicians working at job site shall have completed a
copper technician installation training class conducted by the warranting manufacturer or BICSI.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 260500.
1. Submit complete at one time. Partial product submittals are not acceptable and will be returned unreviewed.
B. Pre-Construction Submittal:
1. Product Data
a. Submit with data arranged under basic categories, such as, certifications, personnel training,
manufacturer warranty, products, test equipment and calibration, and similar items. Include index with
the submittals.
b. Organize by specification infrastructure component sections described in Part 1 and Part 2 of this
section.
c. Submit Product Data information sheets for coordination with item and model number.
d. Where more than one product is indicated on a page, mark product with arrow or by other means to
identify exact product or products being submitted by specific part number.
e. Submit network test equipment proof of calibration by manufacturer.
f. Submit resumes and certifications of technicians and project manager who will support this project.
Certifications shall include:
1) Manufacturer’s certification to provide warranty
2) RCDD certification
3) Copper installation certification
4) Approved manufacturer classes satisfactorily completed
2. Shop Drawings
a. Submit Shop Drawings of telecommunications cabling systems.
b. Coordinate with other trades prior to submittal and start of installation.
c. Show exact routing of horizontal cabling for workstation distribution throughout building.
d. Label workstation devices to identify cabling being terminated in telecommunications rooms and spaces.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 3 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 3
e. Prepare shop drawings using AutoCAD/ Revit software or as approved by the Owner. Submit shop
drawings full size in PDF format.
1) Project was created in Revit; AutoCAD files shall be extracted from the Revit model by the
Contractor.
C. Test Reports:
1. Prepare test reports and submit to the Owner’s Representative an electronic copy of the detailed test results,
including overall test summary report.
2. Include a copy of the detailed test reports on flash drive in each Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3. Include a hard copy of the summary test sheets in each Operation and Maintenance Manual.
4. Submit electronic copies in PDF and LinkWare software formats, including LinkWare reader software.
D. Record Drawings:
1. Keep complete set of telecommunications drawings in job-site office updated within 3 days to show actual
installation of cabling and equipment during construction.
2. Use of this set of drawings for recording as-built conditions.
3. Indicate where material, equipment, and system component are installed differently from that indicated on the
Contract Drawings, clearly and neatly using ink or indelible pencil in color red during construction.
4. Prepare electronic set of Record Drawings, incorporating changes during construction. Submit Record
Drawings to the Owner’s Representative for review and acceptance.
5. Submit Record Drawings using latest version of AutoCAD software or as approved by the Owner, and in PDF
format. Request (from architect) final architectural background drawing files that incorporate floor plan and
program spaces numbering modifications.
6. AutoCAD drawings shall be e-transmitted to include backgrounds, title blocks and other associated files.
7. Submit electronic copy of Record Drawings in full-size PDF and AutoCAD format, on flash drive.
E. Project Closeout:
1. Submit closeout documentation to the Owner’s Representative and Architect under provisions of Division 01,
Section 270500, and this section.
2. Provide project closeout documentation including but not limited to; test result documentation, Record
Drawings, manufacturer warranty certificates and Operation and Maintenance manuals.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
Accessible ceiling: An area above acoustical ceiling tiles/grid (or lay-in type ceilings) with a readily accessible space.
Gypboard ceilings with access hatches and open to structure spaces shall not be considered accessible ceilings
Administration: Methodology defining the documentation requirements of a cabling system and its containment, the
labeling of functional elements, and the process by which moves, additions, and changes are recorded
Bonding: Permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will ensure electrical
continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed
Cable: An assembly of one or more insulated conductors or optical fibers within an enveloping sheath
Cable run: Length of installed media, which may include other components along its path
Cabling: System of cables, cords, and connecting hardware
Channel: End-to-end transmission path between 2 points at which application-specific equipment is connected
including test cords and patch cords for a maximum total distance of 328 feet (100 meters)
Connecting hardware: Device, or combination of devices, used to connect cables or cable elements
Consolidation point: Location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and
horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways
Cross-connection: Connection scheme between cabling runs, subsystems, and equipment using patch cords or
jumpers that attach to connecting hardware on each end
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 4 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 4
Demarcation point: Point where operational control or ownership changes
Equipment room: Environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications equipment that usually
houses a main or intermediate cross-connect
Ground: Conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an electrical circuit or equipment and the
earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of earth
Horizontal cabling: Distribution media that connects the telecommunications outlet/connector at the work area and
the first piece of connecting hardware in the horizontal cross-connect
Horizontal cross-connect: Group of connectors that allows equipment and backbone cabling to be cross-connected
with patch cords or jumpers
Infrastructure (telecommunications): Collection of those telecommunications components, excluding equipment,
that together provides basic support for the distribution of information within a building or campus
Local area network (LAN): Standard industry term for a network installation that serves a relatively small area (for
example, structured cabling installation serving a building)
Main cross-connect: Cross-connect normally located in the (main) equipment room for cross-connection and
interconnection of entrance cables, first-level backbone cables, and equipment cables
Metropolitan area network (MAN): Data communications network that covers an area larger than a campus area and
smaller than a wide area network
Modular jack: Female telecommunications connector that may be keyed or unkeyed and may have 6 or 8 contact
positions
Outlet/connector (telecommunications): Connecting device in the work area on which a horizontal cable or outlet
cable terminates
Patch cord: Length of cable with connectors on both ends used to join telecommunications circuits/links at the cross-
connect
Patch panel: Connecting hardware system that facilitates cable terminations and cabling administration using patch
cords
Pathway: Sequence of connections that provides connectivity between devices on a network or between networks on
an internetwork; the vertical and horizontal route of the telecommunications cable; a facility for the placement of
telecommunications cabling
Permanent link: Test configuration for link excluding test cords and patch cords for maximum total distance of 295
feet (90 meters)
Plenum: Compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are connected and that forms part of the air
distribution system
Telecommunications Room: Enclosed architectural space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable
terminations, and cross-connect cabling
Storage Area Network (SAN): Specialized high-speed network dedicated to the transport of data between storage
devices and servers
Star topology: Network topology in which services are distributed from or through a central point
Telecommunications: Transmission, emission, and reception of signs, signals, writings, images, and sounds, that is
information of any nature by cable, radio, optical, or other electromagnetic systems
Unshielded twisted pair (UTP): Cable made up of one or more pairs of twisted copper conductors with no metallic
shielding; the entire assembly is covered with an insulating sheath (cable jacket)
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 5 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 5
Wireless access point: Stand-alone hardware device or computer wireless adapter with software that acts as a
wireless communication hub for users of wireless devices to connect with each other and to bridge those devices to the
cabled portion of the network
Wide area network (WAN): Data communications system that uses telecommunications circuits to link LANs that are
distributed over large geographic distances
Wireless local area network (WLAN): Data communications system that uses using radio frequency technology,
such networks transmit and receive data over the air, minimizing the need for wired connections; they combine data
connectivity with user mobility
Work area (workstation): Building space where occupants interact with telecommunications terminal equipment
Work area cable (cord): Cable connecting the telecommunications outlet/connector to the terminal equipment
1.06 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
A. Telecommunications subcontractor shall attend the pre-construction meeting as required by the Contractor or the
Owner’s Representative.
B. Provide a schedule, indicating installation tasks, time duration for each task and coordination items to be discussed
5 days prior to the meeting, to the Contractor and to the Owner’s Representative.
1.07 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION
A. Structured cabling system shall be covered by an Extended Product and Application Assurance Warranty.
1. Warranty shall cover passive telecommunications infrastructure copper and optical fiber connectivity and
cabling products and performance from the date of installation registration and will support existing or future
applications.
2. Approved manufacturer solution partner and warranty is:
a. Berk-Tek/ Leviton Technologies – Limited Lifetime warranty
b. Ortronics/ Superior Essex (nCompass) – Limited Lifetime warranty
c. CommScope Uniprise – 25-year warranty
3. Installation practices shall follow the installation guidelines and procedures specified in the manufacturer
certified installer training course and current TIA standards.
4. Submit closeout documentation in accordance with the manufacturer warranty requirements to comply for
acceptance of warranty.
B. Provide the original hard copy certificate for the Application Assurance Warranty to the Owner.
1.08 MATERIAL PROVISIONS
A. Deliver materials to the Owner under provisions of this section.
B. Contractor shall be responsible to provide a material transmittal for all materials being provided to the Owner as
described herein and that are not permanently installed. Transmittal shall be signed by the Owner receiving the
materials. Transmittal shall be included as part of the O&M manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Substitutions: The substitution of products shall adhere to the requirements defined in Division 01 and this section.
1. Submit requests for substitutions a minimum of 10 days prior to Bid date. Request submitted less than 10
days prior to, shall not be accepted.
2. The basis of design for manufacturer partners is Berk-Tek cabling, and Leviton connectivity as specified
herein.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 6 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 6
3. Copper connectivity shall be Augmented Category 6:
a. Pre-approved acceptable alternate manufacturer partners and connectivity are:
1) Superior Essex Cabling with Ortronics Connectivity.
(a) Copper: Category 6A 10Gain cabling with Ortronics TracJack modular jacks and Clarity (6-
port module) patch panels.
2) Uniprise Cabling and Connectivity.
(a) Copper: Category 6A Ultra 10 cabling with UNJ10G modular jacks and Universal 10G patch
panels.
2.02 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. Augmented Category 6 UTP cabling for interior spaces:
1. Horizontal cables shall be constructed from 23 AWG insulated solid bare copper conductors formed into four
individually twisted pairs with three monofilaments.
2. Conductors shall have an impedance of 100 10% / 100m.
3. Cable performance shall be greater than the minimum compliant attributes by TIA-568-C standard. NEXT and
PSNEXT shall be a minimum of 3.0dB/ 4.0dB and ACRF and PSACRF shall be a minimum of 8.0dB above
the minimum required values.
4. Cables shall meet the most current technical characteristics of TIA-568-C standard.
a. Wire map
b. Length
c. Insertion loss (Attenuation) 45.3dB/100m @ 500MHz
d. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss 33.8dB/100m @ 500MHz
e. Attenuation to crosstalk ratio far-end (ACRF) 17.8dB/100m @ 500 MHz
f. Minimum power sum alien near end crosstalk (PS-ANEXT) Loss 62.0dB @ 500MHz
g. Minimum power sum attenuation to alien crosstalk ratio far-end (PS-AACRF) Loss 34.2 @ 500MHz
h. Return loss (RL) 15.2dB/100m @ 500MHz
i. Propagation delay (PD) 70% nom
j. Delay skew (DS) 45ns/100m max
5. Cables shall be NFPA 262 CMP (plenum) rated unless otherwise noted with a maximum cable diameter 0.250
inches.
a. Manufacturer Berk-Tek LANmark-SST series:
1) Blue plenum rated, Part No. 11101842
2.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORKSTATION DEVICES
A. Category 6A Modules:
1. 8-Position 8-Conductor modules shall be Category 6A, dual reactance technology, non-keyed, universal
T568A/B pin configuration standard and used to terminate Category 6A UTP cabling as specified herein.
Module shall be high impact plastic housing, flame retardant UL 94V-O, modular contacts shall be beryllium
copper, nickel plating under 50 micro-inches gold plating in contact area. IDC contacts shall be phosphor
bronze, nickel under plating with tin lead over plate serving 22 through 24 AWG.
a. Manufacturer Leviton:
1) Category 6A module:
(a) White, Part No. 6110G-RW6
2) Blank module in package of 10:
(a) White, Part No. 41084-BW
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 7 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 7
B. Faceplates:
1. Faceplate shall be manufactured to hold 8P8C modules with recessed designation strips with clear plastic
covers in accordance with the TIA-606-B labeling standard.
a. Manufacturer Leviton:
1) 4-port thermoplastic:
(a) White, Part No. 42080-4WS
2) 4-port stainless steel, Part No. 43080-1L4
C. Surface Mount Boxes:
1. Surface mount boxes shall be thermoplastic to hold 8P8C modules with recessed designation strips with clear
plastic covers in accordance with the TIA-606-B labeling standard.
a. Manufacturer Leviton:
1) 1-Port white, Part No. 41089-1WP
2) 2-Port white, Part No. 41089-2WP
D. Floor Box and Poke-Thru Pedestal Frame:
1. Frame shall hold four 8P8C modules and shall utilize a Decora style configuration.
a. Manufacturer Leviton:
1) White, Part No. 41644-00W
2.04 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Rack Mounted Cable Management:
1. Horizontal cable management panels shall distribution rings to secure copper patch cords.
a. Manufacturer Leviton:
1) 1RU panel, Part No. 49253-LPM
2) 2RU panel, Part No. 49253-BCM
2.05 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM CONNECTIVITY
A. Patch Panels:
1. Augmented Category 6 Modular Patch Panels:
a. Augmented Category 6, 8-Position 8-Conductor module, non-keyed, dual reactance technology, 110
type printed circuit board style patch panels, universal T568A/B pin configuration standard and used to
terminate UTP cables as specified herein. Patch panels shall be high density, 6-port modules, panel
shall be16-gauge steel with black painted finish; module shall be high impact plastic housing, flame
retardant UL 94V-O, and fully encased protected printed circuitry. Modular contacts shall be beryllium
copper, nickel under plating, 50 micro-inches of gold in contact area with IDC contacts phosphor bronze,
nickel under plating with tin lead over plate, serving 22 through 24 AWG.
1) Manufacturer Leviton:
(a) 24 port patch panel, Part No. 6A586-U24
(b) 48 port patch panel, Part No. 6A586-U48
2.06 OPEN CABLING SUPPORTS
A. Accessories and mounting hardware shall be provided for securing supports to structure for a complete and working
installation of open cabling supports. Supports shall comply with TIA requirements for structured cabling systems
and pathway supports. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for quantity of cables supported.
B. Hook & Loop Fasteners:
1. Hook and loop fastener rolls shall be 0.5-inch in width. Shear strength for plenum hook and loop fasteners
shall be 29 PSI. Hook and loop fasteners installed in plenum air spaces shall be UL Listed (plenum) and be in
the color maroon.
a. Manufacturer Leviton, plenum, Part No. 43115-75P or equal
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 8 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 8
C. Circular Cable Retainer:
1. Cable retainers shall be of plastic material with rounded edges, plenum rated, utilizing an easy-lock closure
and an attachment base. Cable retainers shall be screwed into structure and only be utilized in spaces that
are extremely tight and J-hooks do not have sufficient space to be mounted.
a. Manufacturer Erico Caddy, Part No. CAT CR50
D. J-Hooks:
1. J-hooks shall have a Galvanized finish with rounded edges for smoother cable pull and greater corrosion
resistance.
a. Manufacturer Erico Caddy:
1) 1” Dia., Part No. CAT16HP
2) 1-5/16” Dia., Part No. CAT21HP
3) 2” Dia., Part No. CAT32HP
E. Adjustable Cable Support:
1. Adjustable cable supports shall be of steel and polyethylene, plenum rated, with unlocking and locking bar
allowing additional cables to be added easily after installation.
a. Manufacturer Erico Caddy, Part No. CAT425
2.07 FIRE-RATED PATHWAYS
A. Fire-rated pathway device shall consist of a heavy gauge galvanized steel raceway lined with intumescent
firestopping material. The intumescent firestopping material shall automatically adjust to the size of the cabling
bundle and shall permit cabling to be added or removed without the need to remove the firestopping material.
Provide the necessary quantity of wall plates to support the pathway device. The pathway device shall be UL tested
and classified in accordance with ASTM E814 (UL1479).
1. On the 3-inch and 4-inch sleeves, provide radius control modules at the end of each sleeve through wall
transitions and penetrations.
a. Manufacturer Specified Technologies, Inc. EZ Path:
1) 1.5-Inch fire-rated pathway device, Part No. EZD22
2) 3-Inch fire-rated pathway device, Part. No. EZDP33FWS
3) 3-Inch radius control module, Part No. RCM33
B. Firestopping putty shall be a one-part, two-stage intumescent, non-hardening compound. The putty, when exposed
to high heat or flame shall be capable of expanding a minimum of five times. Range of continuing expansion shall be
from 230°F to >1,000°F (110°C to >538°C). The putty shall be soft and pliable with aggressive adhesion and shall
not contain any water-soluble intumescent ingredients. The putty shall be UL Classified and/or FM Systems
Approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL1479).
1. Manufacturer Specified Technologies, Inc. SpecSeal:
a. 24” putty bar, Part No. SSP28
b. 36” putty bar, Part No. SSP100
2.08 MATERIAL PROVISIONS
A. Materials shall be provided to the Owner as specified herein. Deliver to the Owner Representative 21 days prior to
Substantial Completion. Include a signed transmittal to the Owner or Owner’s Representative for each type of patch
cord, quantity, length, and color provided as part of the Final Acceptance.
1. Copper Patch Cords
a. Augmented Category 6 Patch Cords
1) Patch cords shall be constructed from Augmented Category 6 4-pair 23 AWG, stranded patch
cable material.
2) Patch cord cable assembly shall be UL listed and shall meet FCC Part 65 plug and termination.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 9 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 9
Item Manufacturer Part Number Qty. Length Color Description
1 Leviton 6AS10-3L 12 3’-0” Blue Data
2 Leviton 6AS10-5L 24 5’-0” Blue Data
3 Leviton 6AS10-7L 24 7’-0” Blue Data
4 Leviton 6AS10-10L 12 10’-0” Blue Data
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ADDITIONAL CABLING
A. Provide an additional (12) Category 6A cables to be located during construction by the Owner. Workstation devices
shall be as specified herein including but not limited to; cabling, faceplates, modules, blank modules, open cabling
supports, labeling and testing.
1. Assume an installed cable length of 295’.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for installation as indicated on the Contract Documents.
B. Coordinate Work with other trades for complete and operational system.
C. Include supplementary and miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to and necessary for sound,
secure, and complete installation, whether or not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents.
D. Provide suitable barriers and take any other safety precautions required by applicable codes.
E. Work area shall be kept free from debris of all types and remove all rubbish resulting from their work on the
premises. Upon completion, vacuum and clean room floors, equipment racks, enclosures, and cable management
where work has been performed.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for any building repairs made necessary by their work or caused by negligence of
their employees. No cutting, notching, drilling or altering of any kind shall be done to the building without first
obtaining permission from the Owner.
G. Owner may have other contracts in connection with this work for the installation of software and equipment.
Contractor shall provide other Trade Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and execution of their
work and shall properly coordinate other trade’s work with theirs as required.
H. Provide patch panels and blocks indicated on the telecommunications drawings whether or not they are fully
populated with cables.
I. Provide cables, devices and equipment racking systems as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
3.03 ABANDONED CABLING
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition, removal and disposal of all existing abandoned
telecommunications cabling and infrastructure in its entirety per NEC Article 800 and as identified on the Contract
Drawings. Abandoned cabling shall be defined as any telecommunications cabling that is not terminated at both
ends at a module or other equipment and is not identified for future use with a tag.
B. Telecommunications cabling and infrastructure shall include but not limited to, faceplates, surface mount boxes,
RJ11 and 8P8C modules, horizontal UTP cabling, copper and optical fiber backbone infrastructure, innerduct,
cabling support systems, equipment racks, horizontal and vertical cable management, equipment shelving, ladder
tray, dedicated telecommunications surface raceway, 110 and 66 blocks, rack mount and surface mount fiber
cabinets and other related passive infrastructure.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 10 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 10
C. Contractor shall salvage all telecommunications equipment racks, patch panels, horizontal and vertical cable
management and optical fiber connectivity being demolished. These items shall be returned to the Owner unless
directed by the Owner to be disposed of by the contractor. All other telecommunications passive infrastructure shall
be disposed of by the contractor.
D. Provide blank cover plates for demolished flush mount outlets, surface mount boxes, modular furniture feed
locations, and junction boxes.
E. Provide blank cover plate for demolished modular furniture telecommunications devices. Match modular furniture
manufacturer system, make and base channel color.
F. Provide new cover plates for surface mount raceway systems after demolition of existing devices. Cover plate
sections shall be seamless between new devices. Cover plates shall match existing base color.
G. Provide fire stopping of existing horizontal and vertical conduit sleeve, after existing horizontal and backbone cabling
has been demolished. Provide fire stopping of existing wall penetrations. Seal all penetrations with approved fire
stopping materials.
3.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Primary function of a telecommunications room is the termination of horizontal, backbone and service entrance
cabling to compatible connecting hardware.
B. Telecommunications room also provides a controlled environment to house telecommunications equipment,
connecting hardware, and splice enclosures serving a portion of the building.
C. Provide equipment including the following, but not limited to the following, and shall be installed according to the
Contract Drawings:
1. Equipment rack cable management
2. Cross-connect patch panels and termination blocks, whether they are populated or not
3. Telecommunications workstation devices
4. Cable tray and ladder rack
3.05 OPEN CABLING SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Cabling shall be run exposed as "open cabling" in accessible ceiling spaces and accessible ceiling plenums, unless
otherwise noted. Where ceiling spaces are inaccessible or open to structure cabling shall be routed in conduit.
B. Provide all hanger supports and cable supports for cabling specified in this section. All support structures shall
adhere to the requirements in the National Electrical Code.
C. Cabling supports shall be spaced no further than 4’-0" apart.
D. Cabling bundles shall not sag a maximum of two inches from the bottom of the cable support.
E. Provide all additional cable management products as required to protect exposed cabling and complete the
installation of cabling in a neat professional manner.
F. Floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls unless otherwise specified.
G. Cabling supports shall be installed on their own support system. The use of ceiling grid supports shall be prohibited.
H. Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit or other system supports.
Cabling shall never come in physical contact with these mechanical, fire protection and electrical systems and
raceways.
I. Cabling bundles and supports changing pathway direction shall maintain proper bend radius as to not impact the
physical jacket construction of the cabling. Cabling that becomes damaged during this transition shall be replaced in
its entirety.
J. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for quantity of cables supported in J-hooks and adjustable cable supports.
K. Installers shall observe the applicable requirements and recommended good practices contained within TIA-568-C
standard for cabling installation requirements.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 11 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 11
3.06 CABLING INSTALLATION
A. Telecommunications devices shall be connected to the horizontal cross-connect in a telecommunications room with
horizontal cabling installed in star topology.
B. Horizontal cabling shall be installed in continuous runs from the telecommunications rooms to telecommunications
device locations. Splices are not permitted.
C. Maximum length of horizontal cables shall be 295 feet (90 m) including all service loops.
D. Cabling shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, including but not limited to maximum
tensile loading and maximum bend radius.
E. Cabling shall be organized and identified to facilitate locating and handling individual sheaths for maintenance
functions.
F. Bundles shall be neatly secured without cinching or stressing the cabling, using hook and loop fasteners in open
cabling installations and in the telecommunications room. Hook and loop fasteners shall be loose enough so that the
fastener can be easily rotated around the cabling bundle and does not impact the physical construction of the
cabling.
G. Provide machine typed label on both ends of the horizontal cabling jacket no more than 4-inches from each
termination point.
H. Great care shall be taken to protect all cabling from physical damage beneath floors, above ceilings or elsewhere.
Cabling shall not be exposed to any forces or handling factors that will degrade performance, such as crushing, pull
stressing, twisting, or damaging sheathing materials. When left unattended, all cabling shall be secured and
protected to avoid damage.
I. Hook and loops fasteners shall be utilized in the telecommunications room for all cabling bundles. Tie wraps are
prohibited in the telecommunications rooms and spaces.
J. A spare pull string shall be installed at every outlet installed.
K. Horizontal cabling shall be bundled in dedicated cabling supports in a neat and organized fashion for routing from
the telecommunications rooms utilizing cable trays and open cabling pathways to the telecommunications devices.
L. Route cabling runs from workstations parallel to building grid lines and directly to open cabling pathways without
passing over adjacent office spaces or cubicles.
M. Provide 5 feet of slack in neatly suspended loops above each workstation and 10 feet of slack neatly coiled in the
ladder rack or cable tray in the telecommunications room unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings. Service
loops in the telecommunications room shall not be located above the equipment racks and server enclosures.
N. Cables shall contact only dedicated and properly protected cable accesses and support mechanisms.
O. Telecommunications unshielded twisted pair cabling supported utilizing open cabling methods shall maintain a
minimum separation of three inches from fire alarm, intercom/paging, and security cabling. Cabling supports shall
maintain increased separation requirements when attaching to the same hanger rod to ensure cabling sag maintains
the minimum three-inch separation.
P. Maintain the following distances between cabling and other building systems:
1. One foot from fluorescent lights.
2. Six feet from motors and transformers.
3. Three feet from water piping or other mechanical equipment.
4. One foot from electrical conduits or other electrical equipment.
3.07 CONNECTIVITY AND CABLING INSTALLATION
A. Cabling shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the cabling installation requirements identified in TIA-
568-C, BICSI Telecommunication Cabling Installation Manual, and the manufacturer’s documentation.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 12 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 12
B. Cabling entering the telecommunications room and routing on the ladder rack or cable tray pathway shall be
separated into cabling bundles specific to the patch panel in which it will be terminated to. Cable bundles shall be in
increments of 24 cables.
C. Cabling shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by
an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the equipment rack, enclosure,
or backboard.
D. Cabling transitioning from ladder rack or cable tray pathway shall maintain proper bend radius utilizing waterfall
device brackets for transitioning vertically down the side rail of an equipment rack or server enclosure as to not
impact the physical jacket construction of the cable. Waterfall device brackets shall also be utilized for transitioning
cabling to blocks mounted on plywood. Cabling that become damaged during this transition shall be replaced in their
entirety.
E. Cables shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without
removing the bundle support straps. Cables labeled within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall
not be acceptable.
F. Installation of 8-position 8-conductor modular jacks into faceplates and attaching of the faceplates to the wall shall
ensure that the faceplates are flush. The faceplate shall be secured to the wall but shall not be secured to the wall
with such force as to bow the faceplate.
3.08 WORK AREA
A. 4-pair UTP horizontal cabling shall be terminated on an 8-position 8-conductor modular jack or plug at each
telecommunications device as indicated on the applicable Contract Drawings.
B. Telecommunications devices shall be provided with 8-position 8-conductor modular jacks or plugs in the quantity as
indicated on the applicable Contract Drawings.
3.09 CABLING TERMINATIONS
A. Provide all necessary installation materials, tools and equipment to perform insulation displacement type
terminations at all the telecommunications outlets, and patch panels.
B. Pairs in each cable shall be terminated on a modular patch panel or telecommunications modules in accordance
with this specification.
C. Cabling shall be terminated in accordance with the T568B pin configuration standard.
D. Remove only as much of the cable sheath as is necessary to terminate the cabling on the connecting hardware.
E. A maximum of 0.25” of cable pair twists shall be removed from a 4-pair UTP cable. Cabling and terminations exceed
these dimensions shall be re-terminated.
F. At the horizontal station patch panel, the cabling shall terminate from the center of the 110 IDC termination.
G. Terminate cabling in accordance with connecting hardware manufacturer’s recommendations. All cabling shall
terminate in numerical sequence.
3.10 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the NEC and the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall
be accomplished in a manner acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work.
B. Cabling running through rated floors and walls shall be firestopped in accordance with the requirements within this
Section.
C. Penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate firestop
system. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations
(through one side of a hollow fire rated structure).
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 13 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 13
D. Penetrations created by or for the contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of the contractor’s scope of
work.
E. Firestop putty or pillows shall be used inside conduits and cable trays to provide a re-enterable system allowing
telecommunications cables to be easily removed or added in the future. Firestop putty shall not be water soluble.
F. Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
G. Firestopping sleeved devices shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations including, but not
limited to;
1. Wiring devices shall be installed in locations where indicated on the Contract Drawings, arranged in a single
or multiple sleeve formation at the height specified. Sleeves shall be installed a minimum of 6 inches above
the accessible ceiling grid.
2. Install the devices in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. Apply the factory supplied gasket material prior to the installation of the wall plates.
4. Secure wall plates to devices per the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.11 LABELING
A. General:
1. Labeling shall be in accordance with TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructure.
2. Labels shall be permanent typewritten labels produced by a labeling machine.
3. Labels shall be installed on all cabling at each end. Ensure labels are securely fastened.
4. Labels shall be located within 6 inches of cable termination and placed so they can be easily read.
5. Font type for each type of label shall be Arial with maximum size font allowed.
6. Labeling information will be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Meeting.
7. Labeling shall be completed prior to the Substantial Completion date of the project.
B. Telecommunications Device Labeling:
1. Label shall be produced to fit into the recess provided and covered with a clear plastic cover.
a. TR-2-03-04 where:
1) TR = Telecommunications Room (MC, IC, HC or as indicated on the Contract Drawings)
2) –2 = Equipment rack number
3) –03 = Patch panel number
4) –04 = Port number
2. Above Ceiling Device Labeling
a. A label on the ceiling grid shall be provided at each location where a network device is located above the
ceiling. The label shall be machine generated. The text shall be in bold white letters on black
background printed on 3/4” tape with the maximum font size allowable.
b. Labeling shall be as follows:
1) ‘WAP’ - TR-2-03-04 where:
(a) WAP= Device type as indicated on the Contract Drawings
(b) TR-2-03-04=Cable ID Label
C. Equipment Rack Labeling:
1. Plastic lamacoid nameplate shall be provided for each equipment rack and/or server enclosure in the
telecommunications room.
2. Plastic lamacoid nameplate shall be black with white letters. The nameplate shall be machine engraved with a
size 36 font.
3. Mount the name plate at the top of each equipment rack, server enclosure or wall mount enclosure.
4. Labeling scheme shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 14 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 14
D. Patch Panel Labeling:
1. Station Patch Panel
a. 48-port modular patch panels shall be labeled with sequential numbering starting with “01” for the
topmost patch panel and moving downward to the bottom of the rack. Patch panel labels shall be affixed
to the left-hand side of the patch panel.
b. Horizontal cabling distributed from station patch panels to specialty devices (i.e., wireless access points,
security devices and IP intercom speaker digital clocks) shall have a label in the designation strip space
directly below the 8P8C module identifying the device interconnect point, the designation label shall be
as follows:
1) “WAP - #”, where the “#” represents the Owner’s wireless access point identification number.
2) “CAM - #”, where the “#” represents the Owner’s security video camera identification number.
3) “AC - #”, where the “#” represents the Owner’s IP Access Control room/space identification
number.
3.12 TESTING
A. Test procedures shall be as prescribed by the TIA, Insulated Cable Engineers Association and the National
Electrical Testing Association.
B. Test Equipment:
1. Network testing equipment shall be a Fluke Networks DSX-5000 Cable Analyzer or equal and shall have a
certified calibration from the manufacturer within the past 12 months at the time of testing. Proof of calibration
shall be provided with the product submittal. Test equipment shall be utilized to test horizontal and backbone
cabling.
2. Field tester and adapters shall be certified by an independent laboratory as meeting or exceeding current level
as defined in TIA-1152 Level IIIe.
3. 8P8C test plug for the network testing equipment adapters shall be in range of values defined in Annex C with
TIA-568-C for Near-end Crosstalk, Far-end Crosstalk and Return Loss.
4. Test equipment shall support the complete suite of Resistance Unbalanced standards for PoE per IEEE
802.3af, IEEE 802.3at and TIA-568-C.2.
5. Test equipment shall be able to test up to a 1000 MHz frequency range.
6. Test equipment shall be ISO 9001 certified.
7. An electronic copy of the manufacturer’s testing procedures shall be kept in the job site office.
8. Test equipment batteries shall be charged daily and a level of greater than twenty-five percent of capacity
shall be maintained during the testing.
9. Test equipment shall be calibrated daily before the start of testing.
C. Horizontal Cabling:
1. Horizontal cabling shall be certified to meet or exceed the permanent link performance specifications for
Augmented Category 6 horizontal cabling tested with a frequency range from 1MHz to 500 MHZ as defined in
TIA-568-C.
2. Certifications shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable installed:
a. Building identification
b. Cable identification
c. Date of test
d. Test equipment manufacturer and model number
e. Wire map
1) Continuity to the remote end.
2) Shorts between any two or more conductors
3) Reversed pairs
4) Split pairs
5) Transposed pairs
6) Any other miswiring
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 15 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 15
f. Length
g. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT)
h. Attenuation to crosstalk ration far-end (ACRF)
i. Power sum Attenuation to crosstalk ration far-end (PSACRF)
j. Power sum-near-end crosstalk (PS-NEXT)
k. Return loss (RL)
l. Propagation delay (PD)
m. Delay skew (DS)
3. Horizontal cabling shall be tested using a Permanent Link configuration as defined in TIA-568-C.
4. Test reports with an asterisk (*) or fails, shall be documented identifying the reason for the test failure and a
corrective action plan developed.
5. After corrective action has been completed, the permanent link shall be retested.
6. It is the Telecommunications Contractor’s responsibility to ensure 100 percent of the network horizontal
cabling system links pass all tests.
7. Test results shall be organized by building identification and cable identification number. The test results shall
contain the date and time of when each test was saved in the memory of the tester. The test results shall be
recorded on a flash drive in both PDF and LinkWare software formats.
3.13 WIRELESS ACCESS POINT INSTALLATION
A. Provide installation of the Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed wireless access points, mounting kits, and
detachable antennas.
B. Provide cable pass-through device with dedicated support wire at suspended ceiling applications for patch cord
connection from wireless access point device to the above ceiling telecommunications device. Provide at wireless
access point ceiling installations at accessible ceilings.
C. Provide the patch cord interconnect from the work area device to the NIC connection within the wireless access
point. See Material Provisions specified herein for patch cord requirements supporting wireless.
1. For bidding purposes only, assume the total number of wireless access points to be installed on the ceiling or
above the ceiling within the building shall be Four.
2. Provide an installation summary spreadsheet indicating the unique wireless access point identifier, work area
device port identification, assigned MAC address and serial number.
END OF SECTION
Use the following table to track the installation of the additional workstation cabling as described in Paragraph 3.1.A.
Port Qty. Room Name Room No. Date of Install
Building J First Floor Remodel – Phase I 27 11 00
Renton Technical College TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Project No. 2022-511 G (1-1) Page 16 of 16
September 30, 2022 27 11 00 - 16
Port Qty. Room Name Room No. Date of Install